Data-Driven Integrated Circuit Architecture

ABSTRACT

The exemplary embodiments provide a reconfigurable integrated circuit architecture comprising: a configurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of data operations, each data operation corresponding to a context of a plurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality of output queues; one or more configuration and control registers to store, for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality of configuration bits, a run status bit, and a plurality of bits designating at least one data input queue and at least one data output queue; and an element controller coupled to the configurable circuit element and to the one or more configuration and control registers, the element controller to allow loading of a context configuration and execution of a data operation upon the arrival of input data in the context-designated data input queue when the context run status is enabled and the context-designated data output queue has a status to accept output data.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a conversion of and claims priority to: (1) Kelem,Steven Hennick et al., U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No.61/376,615, filed Aug. 24, 2010, entitled “Hierarchically ScalableReconfigurable DDM Architecture With Unit-Delay Modules”; (2) Kelem,Steven Hennick et al., U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No.61/376,659, filed Aug. 24, 2010, entitled “Hierarchically ExtensibleReconfigurable Zones in a Resilient Device Architecture”; (3) Kelem,Steven Hennick et al., U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No.61/376,662, filed Aug. 24, 2010, entitled “Multi-Context MemoryManagement Unit”; (4) Kelem, Steven Hennick et al., U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application Ser. No. 61/376,666, filed Aug. 24, 2010, entitled“On-Chip Configuration”; and (5) Kelem, Steven Hennick et al., U.S.Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/376,672, filed Aug. 24, 2010,entitled “Data-Driven Integrated Circuit Architecture”; which arecommonly assigned herewith, the contents of which are incorporatedherein by reference with the same full force and effect as if set forthin their entireties herein, and with priority claimed for all commonlydisclosed subject matter.

This application is a continuation-in-part of and claims priority toKelem, Steven Hennick et al., U.S. patent application Ser. No.12/977,319, filed Dec. 23, 2010, entitled “Fault Tolerant IntegratedCircuit Architecture”, which is a continuation of and claims priority toKelem, Steven Hennick et al., U.S. patent application Ser. No.12/463,040, filed May 8, 2009 and now U.S. Pat. No. 7,880,497 issuedFeb. 1, 2011, entitled “Fault Tolerant Integrated Circuit Architecture”,which is a continuation of and claims priority to Kelem, Steven Hennicket al., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/766,310, filed Jun. 21, 2007and now U.S. Pat. No. 7,548,084 issued Jun. 16, 2009, entitled “FaultTolerant Integrated Circuit Architecture”, which is acontinuation-in-part of and claims priority to Kelem, Steven Hennick etal., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/471,832, filed Jun. 21, 2006and now U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,871 issued Sep. 23, 2008, entitled “FaultTolerant Integrated Circuit Architecture”, which are commonly assignedherewith, the contents of all of which are incorporated herein byreference with the same full force and effect as if set forth in theirentireties herein, and with priority claimed for all commonly disclosedsubject matter.

This application is also a continuation of Steven Hennick Kelem et al.,U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/785,433, filed May 22, 2010,entitled “Element Controller for a Resilient Integrated CircuitArchitecture”, which is continuation of Steven Hennick Kelem et al.,U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/131,896, filed Jun. 2, 2008 andissued Jul. 6, 2010 as U.S. Pat. No. 7,750,672, entitled “ElementController for a Resilient Integrated Circuit Architecture”, which is acontinuation of Steven Hennick Kelem et al., U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 11/765,986, filed Jun. 20, 2007 and issued Jul. 8, 2008 as U.S.Pat. No. 7,397,275, entitled “Element Controller for a ResilientIntegrated Circuit Architecture”, which is a continuation-in-part of andclaims priority to Steven Hennick Kelem et al., U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 11/471,832, filed Jun. 21, 2006 and issued Sep. 23, 2008 asU.S. Pat. No. 7,427,871, entitled “Fault Tolerant Integrated CircuitArchitecture” and which is a continuation-in-part of and claims priorityto Kelem, Steven Hennick et al., U.S. patent application Ser. No.11/471,875, filed Jun. 21, 2006 and now U.S. Pat. No. 7,429,870 issuedSep. 30, 2008, entitled “Resilient Integrated Circuit Architecture”,which are commonly assigned herewith, the contents of all of which areincorporated herein by reference with the same full force and effect asif set forth in their entireties herein, and with priority claimed forall commonly disclosed subject matter.

The U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/766,310, filed Jun. 21, 2007 andnow U.S. Pat. No. 7,548,084 issued Jun. 16, 2009 is also acontinuation-in-part of and claims priority to Kelem, Steven Hennick etal., U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/471,875, filed Jun. 21, 2006and now U.S. Pat. No. 7,429,870 issued Sep. 30, 2008, entitled“Resilient Integrated Circuit Architecture”, which is commonly assignedherewith, the contents of all of which are incorporated herein byreference with the same full force and effect as if set forth in itsentirety herein, and with priority claimed for all commonly disclosedsubject matter.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates, in general, to integrated circuits and,more particularly, to integrated circuitry having distributed andconfigurable circuit elements, distributed communication circuitelements, and distributed control circuit elements.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Historically, integrated circuits (“ICs”) which are configurablepost-fabrication have been dominated by field programmable gate arrays(“FPGAs”), which provide an array of identical logic gates or otherelements. In some integrated circuit embodiments, the gate array is alsocoupled to one or more microprocessor cores, for the FPGA components toprovide configurable, application-specific acceleration of selectedcomputations. The logic elements in an FPGA are typically very“fine-grained”, as gate arrays which can be connected through datainputs and outputs (“I/O”) to provide a more advanced function such asaddition, subtraction or comparison, without separate hard-wired,application-specific components directly providing such advancedfunctions. The process for creating the configurations for the gatearrays of FPGAs is comparatively slow, especially so for determiningwhether any given configuration meets timing requirements, so that FPGAsgenerally have not been capable of real-time reconfiguration forimmediate changes in functionality, as such timing cannot be guaranteed.

In other circumstances, configurable ICs have involved large-scale (or“coarse-grained” configurable logic elements which are capable ofsignificant functionality, such as multimedia processing, arithmeticprocessing, and communication functionality. While these large-scaleconfigurable logic elements provide extremely capable acceleration, eachgroup of configurable logic elements is typically different and requiresseparate programming to carry out its functions. In addition, suchlarge-scale configurable logic elements are not translatable to otherfunctions, exhibiting similar constraints of application-specific ICs(“ASICs”).

Configurable capabilities have also been added to microprocessor, ASICand memory ICs. For example, in memory ICs, extra or redundant rows andcolumns are fabricated; when subsequent testing may reveal that selectedrows and columns have defects, those affected IC regions are disabled,with the balance of the memory IC being useable potentially and, withthe redundancy, may still meet the memory capacity specification. Inother circumstances, some amount of configurability may be added tocorrect for design errors and other defects after the IC has beenfabricated, or to allow modification of inputs and outputs, such as forconfigurable I/O and configurable data path widths.

These other configurable architectures also do not scale well, for avariety of reasons. In some instances, interior regions of the IC becomestarved for resources, as the exterior regions consume all of theinput/output (I/O) capability. In other instances, communication withinthe IC becomes problematic.

These configurable architectures may also exhibit timingunpredictability and a corresponding inability to provide a timingclosure. For example, recompiling the same netlist may result indifferent timing delays. Accordingly, a system designer may not be ableto know in advance if a particular mapping, placement and routing willmeet system requirements until the mapping, placement and routing hasbeen performed, which is a very time-consuming process with highconfiguration variability.

Accordingly, a need remains for a configurable IC architecture which canbe readily configured and reconfigured, with predictable timing closure.In addition, such an architecture should be readily scalable to createlarger architectures for selected applications.

In addition, after configuration and during operation, such FPGAs,ASICs, processors, and other configurable logic do not exhibitresiliency. For example, if a portion of the IC becomes defective duringoperation, the entire IC fails instantly, losing all functionality.While the IC may be taken off line or removed, diagnosed, and dependingupon the damage, possibly reconfigured, such ICs are not capable ofreal-time reconfiguration and transferring of functionality tounaffected portions of the IC.

These known technologies, however, do not address the increasing numberof defects which are now arising in sub-100 nm IC fabrication. Moreparticularly, as IC feature size continues to decrease below 90 nm,there are increasing levels of defects and decreased IC yields. Inaddition, while an IC initially may be sufficiently free of defects tooperate for its intended use, the smaller feature size also increasesthe probability of IC failure during operation, such as due to tunnelingand electromigration effects.

In addition, while each of these prior art technologies have their ownadvantages, such as an ability to correct design flaws and towork-around minor fabrication defects, none of these prior arttechnologies provide sustainable resiliency over time, during ICoperation. Whether defects were created during fabrication or muchlater, during IC usage, these known technologies simply cannotaccommodate both certain kinds of defects and certain levels of defects,and the entire IC fails completely. Such failure is often catastrophic,such that the entire IC fails instantly and without warning. Forexample, if a region of a microprocessor fails, the entiremicroprocessor becomes instantly useless.

To attempt to provide some level of resiliency, these varioustechnologies have simply added some redundancy. For example, multipleprocessors will be placed on the same IC, such that if a defect causesone processor to fail, a redundant processor is available to take over.In these circumstances, however, either the redundant processor waspreviously completely idle and unused, or its prior functioning has beensuperseded and completely lost. In either event, this resiliency is atthe expense of approximately twice the IC area and significantlyincreased manufacturing costs. In addition, such basic redundancyefforts do not account for defects which may occur within all redundantcomponents, as even small defects may cause such components to fail.

As a consequence, a need remains for an integrated circuit architecturewhich is significantly resilient and robust despite fabrication or usagedefects which can affect any components, without the expense ofotherwise unused redundancy. Such an IC should provide for ongoingadaptation, such that when a defect arises, functionality may betransferred to an unaffected region in real-time or near-real time. Suchtechnology should provide for configuration (programming or othersoftware) for the IC which allows such transferable functionality,without requiring the entire program to be transferred to a completelyredundant processor. In addition, such an IC should provide for agraceful degradation with increasing defects or problems, rather than acatastrophic failure.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The exemplary embodiments of the present invention provide an integratedcircuit architecture which is scalable and repeatable. Exemplaryembodiments provide for “unit delay” timing within isochronous zones andfor unit delay timing between zones. As a consequence, timing closure isknown and repeatable once configurations are mapped and bound in theexemplary apparatus. Exemplary architectures are also scalable andrepeatable, up to the practical or physical limits of an IC fabricationtechnology.

Exemplary embodiments are also “data driven”, in which incoming data isutilized to control execution of operations. Highly novel in a data flowarchitecture, the exemplary embodiments provide for a high degree ofcontrol of data flow operations, including partial execution,conditional execution, execution ordering, and data output ordering. Inaddition, exemplary embodiments also utilize “back pressure” to optimizeuse of resources and provide data integrity.

Other illustrated embodiments provide circuitry, communication andcontrol which allows and provides for on-chip configurationcapabilities, including reconfiguration and partial reconfigurationduring run-time.

Exemplary embodiments are also illustrated for configurable memorycontrol which allows multi-threaded and multi-context execution,allowing multiple concurrent read and write operations directly from aconfigurable full interconnect communication channel.

Exemplary embodiments also provide an integrated circuit architecturewhich is capable of significant resiliency, without otherwise unusedredundancy. The exemplary IC embodiment may be adapted on an ongoingbasis, as may be necessary in the event of a defect, or as may bedesirable for incorporation of a new program or function. For example,in the event a defect arises, functionality may be transferred to anunaffected region in real-time or near-real time. The exemplaryarchitecture and software for the IC also allows such transferablefunctionality, without requiring the entire program to be transferred toa completely redundant processor or otherwise unused computationalblock. In addition, the exemplary IC embodiments provide for a gracefuldegradation and notification with increasing defects or problems, whichmay occur during use (in addition to fabrication), rather than acatastrophic failure.

An exemplary embodiment provides a reconfigurable integrated circuitcapable of on-chip configuration and reconfiguration, with theintegrated circuit comprising: a plurality of configurable compositecircuit elements, a configuration and control bus coupled to theplurality of configurable composite circuit elements, a memory; and asequential processor coupled to the configuration and control bus and tothe memory. Each composite circuit element comprises: a configurablecircuit; and an element interface and control circuit, with the elementinterface and control circuit comprising an element controller and atleast one configuration and control register, the at least oneconfiguration and control register to store one or more configurationand control words. The configuration and control bus comprises aplurality of address and control lines and a plurality of data lines.The sequential processor, in turn, may write a first configuration tothe at least one configuration and control register of an addressedfirst configurable composite circuit element to configure or reconfigurethe configurable circuit.

In an exemplary embodiment, the sequential processor may write a datasource address to the at least one configuration and control registerfor the addressed first configurable composite circuit element toprovide input data routing; and further may write a data source addressof the addressed first configurable composite circuit element to one ormore configuration and control registers of other configurable compositecircuit elements to provide output data routing for the addressed firstconfigurable composite circuit element.

In various exemplary embodiments, the sequential processor may read thefirst configuration and the data source address from the memory andtransfer the first configuration and the data source address to theaddressed first configurable composite circuit element over theconfiguration and control bus. The sequential processor may generate thefirst configuration, and/or may generate the data source address.

In exemplary embodiments, the integrated circuit may further comprise: amessage-based interconnect bus to transfer a plurality of messages, eachmessage comprising control information and a data payload; and a messagemanager circuit coupled to the message-based interconnect bus, to theconfiguration and control bus, and to the memory, the message managercircuit to receive and interpret the plurality of messages. When thedata payload is a second configuration, the message manager circuit maywrite the second configuration to at least one configuration and controlregister of an addressed second configurable composite circuit elementto configure or reconfigure the configurable circuit element of theaddressed second configurable composite circuit element. The messagemanager circuit further may write a second data source address to the atleast one configuration and control register of the addressed secondconfigurable composite circuit element to provide input data routing forthe addressed second configurable composite circuit element. When thedata payload is a configuration, the message manager circuit further maywrite the configuration to the memory, and when the data payload isapplication data, the message manager circuit further may write theapplication data to the memory or transfer the application data to aconfigurable composite circuit element or to the sequential processor.The message manager circuit may transmit a message to or receive amessage from an absolute address, an application-specified address, or adata path-specified address, for example. In addition, the messagemanager circuit may transmit a message to or receive a messageindependently of the sequential processor or a host processor, and maygenerate and transmit an acknowledgment message automatically uponreception of a message. The sequential processor and/or the messagemanager circuit also may read a configuration from one or moreconfiguration and control registers of an addressed third compositecircuit element. Also in addition, the message-based interconnect busmay be coupled to an integrated circuit input and output to receive andtransmit a plurality of messages from and to the integrated circuit.

In various exemplary embodiments, the sequential processor and/or themessage manager circuit also may further may broadcast configurationdata over the configuration and control bus to the plurality ofcomposite circuit elements. Also in various exemplary embodiments, eachconfigurable composite circuit element has a plurality of contexts, andthe sequential processor and/or the message manager circuit also maywrite a configuration and control data to the at least one configurationand control register for a first context of the addressed firstconfigurable composite circuit element, the control data comprising atask identifier of a plurality of tasks. The sequential processor and/orthe message manager circuit also may further may concurrently enable aplurality of contexts of a plurality of configurable composite circuitelements by broadcasting second control information over theconfiguration and control bus, the second control information having thetask identifier and an enable run status. The sequential processorand/or the message manager circuit also may suspend a task bybroadcasting second control information over the configuration andcontrol bus, the second control information having the task identifierand a halt run status.

In an exemplary embodiment, the sequential processor may move a task bybroadcasting second control information over the configuration andcontrol bus, the second control information having the task identifierand a halt run status; the sequential processor may write a secondconfiguration, a data source address, a data source context and the taskidentifier to a one or more configuration and control registers for asecond context of an addressed second configurable composite circuitelement to configure or reconfigure the configurable circuit and provideinput data routing for the second context of the addressed configurablecomposite circuit element; and the sequential processor further maywrite a data source address and a data source context of the secondcontext of the addressed second configurable composite circuit elementto one or more configuration and control registers of other configurablecomposite circuit elements to provide output data routing for the secondcontext of the addressed second configurable composite circuit element.

In various exemplary embodiments, an initial configuration and datarouting is transferred from an external source into the integratedcircuit and is stored in the memory, and the sequential processorsubsequently may write a second configuration to at least oneconfiguration and control register for the addressed first configurablecomposite circuit element to reconfigure the configurable circuitwithout involvement of the external source. In another exemplaryembodiment, an initial configuration and data routing is transferredfrom an external source into the integrated circuit and is stored in thememory, and the sequential processor subsequently may write a secondconfiguration to at least one configuration and control register for theaddressed first configurable composite circuit element to reconfigurethe configurable circuit without involvement of a non-volatile memorystoring configurations. For example and without limitation, an externalor internal read-only memory storing configurations and locations forthe configurations is not required for on-chip configuration andreconfiguration. In addition, once an initial configuration and datarouting is provided to the integrated circuit, the integrated circuit isfully capable of reconfiguring, without involvement of any device orinput external to the chip.

Another exemplary embodiment provides an integrated circuit capable ofon-chip configuration and reconfiguration, with the integrated circuitcomprising: a plurality of configurable composite circuit elements, aconfiguration and control bus coupled to the plurality of configurablecomposite circuit elements, a memory; and a message manager circuit.Each composite circuit element has a plurality of contexts and comprisesa configurable circuit and an element interface and control circuit, theelement interface and control circuit comprising an element controllerand one or more configuration and control registers, with the one ormore configuration and control registers storing a configuration andcontrol word for each context of the plurality of contexts. Theconfiguration and control bus comprises a plurality of address andcontrol lines and a plurality of data lines. The message manager circuitis coupled to the configuration and control bus and to the memory, andthe message manager circuit may write a first configuration, a datasource address and a data source context to the one or moreconfiguration and control registers for a first context of an addressedfirst configurable composite circuit element to configure or reconfigurethe configurable circuit for the first context of the addressed firstconfigurable composite circuit element and to provide input data routingfor the first context of the addressed first configurable compositecircuit element.

In an exemplary embodiment, the message manager circuit further maywrite a data source address and a data source context of the firstcontext of the addressed first configurable composite circuit element toone or more configuration and control registers of other configurablecomposite circuit elements to provide output data routing for the firstcontext of the addressed first configurable composite circuit element.

In another exemplary embodiment, the sequential processor may write afirst configuration to the one or more configuration and controlregisters for a first context of an addressed first configurablecomposite circuit element to configure or reconfigure the configurablecircuit for the first context of the addressed first configurablecomposite circuit element; and the message manager circuit may write asecond configuration to the one or more configuration and controlregisters for a second context of an addressed second configurablecomposite circuit element to configure or reconfigure the configurablecircuit for the second context of the addressed second configurablecomposite circuit element.

In another exemplary embodiment, a reconfigurable integrated circuitcomprises a plurality of zones, with each zone of the plurality of zonescomprising: a plurality of composite circuit elements, each compositecircuit element comprising: a configurable circuit element circuit andan element interface and control circuit, the element interface andcontrol circuit comprising an input queue and an output queue; aplurality of cluster queues, each cluster queue comprising an elementinterface and control having an input queue and an output queue; and afirst full interconnect bus coupling every output queue within the zoneto every input queue within the zone; wherein any data operationperformed by a composite circuit element, any data word transfer througha cluster queue, and any data word transfer over the first fullinterconnect bus, is completed within a predetermined unit time delaywhich is independent of application placement and application datarouting. In an exemplary embodiment, the predetermined unit time delayis further independent of application implementation and applicationcompilation to the plurality of composite circuit elements.

In an exemplary embodiment, a first cluster queue has an input queuecoupled to the first full interconnect bus and an output queue coupledto a second full interconnect bus of an adjacent or diagonally adjacentzone of the plurality of zones, and wherein a second cluster queue hasan input queue coupled to the second full interconnect bus and an outputqueue coupled to the first full interconnect bus, and wherein any dataword transfer from the output queue of the first cluster queue to anyinput queue coupled to the second full interconnect bus is completedwithin the predetermined unit time delay.

In an exemplary embodiment, the first full interconnect bus comprises: aplurality of source data lines for transmission of a sourceidentification and a source context identification; a plurality ofapplication data lines; and a plurality of control lines fortransmission of a data valid signal on a first control line, a data denysignal on a second control line, and a data retry signal on a thirdcontrol line. The first full interconnect bus may further comprise aplurality of tag data lines coupled to the plurality of input queues andplurality of output queues. In an exemplary embodiment, each elementinterface and control further comprises: an input controller coupled tothe input queue and further coupled to the plurality of source datalines and plurality of control lines; and an output controller coupledto the output queue and further coupled to the plurality of source datalines and plurality of control lines.

In an exemplary embodiment, within the predetermined unit time delay, anoutput queue is to broadcast output data over the first fullinterconnect bus to all input queues coupled to the first fullinterconnect bus and an output controller is to concurrently broadcast adata valid signal. In addition, each input controller is to assert adata deny signal within the same predetermined unit time delay on thesecond control line when an input queue for the context identified onthe source data lines is unable to accept input data. When a data denysignal is received, an output controller at a later time is to transmita data retry signal on the third control line and to provide for theoutput queue to rebroadcast the output data within the predeterminedunit time delay.

In an exemplary embodiment, the integrated circuit may further comprise:a first message manager circuit; and a configuration and control buscoupled to the first message manager circuit. Each element interface andcontrol may further comprise one or more configuration and controlregisters coupled to the configuration and control bus; and an elementcontroller or a queue controller. In an exemplary embodiment, any dataword transfer over the configuration and control bus to or from thefirst message manager circuit is completed within the predetermined unittime delay. In addition, any data word transfer to or from thesequential processor over any of the configuration and control bus, thefirst full interconnect bus, or to the first message manager circuit, iscompleted within the predetermined unit time delay.

In an exemplary embodiment, the integrated circuit may further comprise:a random access memory; and a memory composite circuit element coupledto the random access memory, the sequential processor, the first messagemanager circuit, and the first full interconnect bus, the memorycomposite circuit element to perform a plurality of concurrent read andwrite operations and complete a transfer of a data word over the firstfull interconnect bus within the predetermined unit time delay.

In an exemplary embodiment, the integrated circuit may further comprise:a first message-based interconnect bus coupled to the first messagemanager circuit; a first message repeater circuit coupled to the firstmessage-based interconnect; a second message manager circuit; and asecond message-based interconnect bus coupled to the second messagemanager circuit and to the first message repeater circuit. In anexemplary embodiment, any data word transfer over the first or secondmessage-based interconnect bus between the first message repeatercircuit and the first and second message manager circuits is completedwithin the predetermined unit time delay. In an exemplary embodiment,the integrated circuit may further comprise: a second message repeatercircuit; and a second message-based interconnect bus coupled to thesecond message repeater circuit and to the first message repeatercircuit. In an exemplary embodiment, any data word transfer between thesecond message repeater circuit and the first message repeater circuitover the second message-based interconnect bus is completed within thepredetermined unit time delay.

Also in an exemplary embodiment, any timing of an application of thereconfigurable integrated circuit is independent of any task placementwithin any selected zone and independent of task data routing within theselected zone of the plurality of zones. In an exemplary embodiment, anytask data routing between adjacent zones of the plurality of zones, foreach data word transfer, adds the predetermined unit time delay to theapplication timing. In an exemplary embodiment, any data word transferthrough a cluster queue between adjacent zones or between diagonallyadjacent zones of the plurality of zones is completed within thepredetermined unit time delay.

In various exemplary embodiments: each input queue of a cluster queuewithin the zone is write-enabled and clocked using a first clock andeach output queue of the cluster queue coupled to an adjacent zone isread-enabled and clocked using a second clock; or each input queue of acluster queue within the zone is write-enabled and clocked using a firstclock and each output queue of the cluster queue coupled to an adjacentzone is clocked using the first clock and is read-enabled using a secondclock; or the plurality of composite circuit elements are clocked usinga first clock, the input queues of the plurality of cluster queues areclocked using the first clock, and the output queues of the plurality ofcluster queues are clocked using a second clock; or the plurality ofcomposite circuit elements and plurality of cluster queues are clockedusing a first clock, the input queues of the plurality of cluster queueswrite-enabled using the first clock, and the output queues of theplurality of cluster queues read-enabled using a second clock.

In various exemplary embodiments, a first zone of the plurality of zonesis tiled next to an adjacent second zone and next to a diagonallyadjacent third zone of the plurality of zones, and a first cluster queueof the plurality of cluster queues completes any data word transferbetween the first full interconnect bus of the first zone and a secondfull interconnect bus of the second zone within the predetermined unittime delay, and a second cluster queue of the plurality of clusterqueues completes a data word transfer between the first fullinterconnect bus of the first zone and a third full interconnect bus ofthe third zone within the predetermined unit time delay.

Also in various exemplary embodiments, a scaled and extended integratedcircuit further comprises: the plurality of zones coupled adjacent anddiagonally adjacent to each other through the plurality of clusterqueues; a random access memory; a memory composite circuit elementcoupled to the random access memory; a configuration and control buscoupled to the plurality of composite circuit elements; a messagemanager circuit coupled to the configuration and control bus and to thememory composite circuit element; a sequential processor coupled to theconfiguration and control bus, the message manager circuit, and thememory composite circuit element; a first message repeater circuit; anda message-based interconnect bus coupled to the first message managercircuit and the message repeater circuit and couplable to a secondmessage manager circuit.

In another exemplary embodiment, a reconfigurable integrated circuitcomprises: a message manager circuit; a sequential processor; aconfiguration and control bus coupled to the message manager circuit andto the sequential processor; a plurality of circuit zones, each circuitzone of the plurality of circuit zones comprising: a plurality ofcomposite circuit elements coupled to the configuration and control bus,each composite circuit element comprising: a configurable circuitelement circuit and an element interface and control circuit, theelement interface and control circuit comprising an input queue and anoutput queue; a first full interconnect bus coupling every output queuewithin the circuit zone to every input queue within the circuit zone;and a plurality of cluster queues coupled to the configuration andcontrol bus, each cluster queue configurable and comprising an elementinterface and control having an input queue and an output queue, eachcluster queue further coupled to the first full interconnect bus andfurther coupled to a second full interconnect bus of an adjacent zone ora diagonally adjacent zone of the plurality of zones; wherein any dataoperation performed by a composite circuit element, any data wordtransfer through a cluster queue, any data word transfer over the firstfull interconnect bus, and any data word transfer over the configurationand control bus, is completed within a predetermined unit time delaywhich is independent of both application placement and application datarouting within the reconfigurable integrated circuit.

In an exemplary embodiment, the reconfigurable integrated circuit mayfurther comprise: a message-based interconnect; a plurality of messagerepeater circuits coupled to the message-based interconnect; a pluralityof circuit clusters, each circuit cluster comprising: a firstcommunication circuit coupled to the message-based interconnect; asequential processor; a configuration and control bus coupled to thefirst communication circuit and to the sequential processor; a pluralityof composite circuit elements, each composite circuit element having aplurality of contexts configurable for data operations, each compositecircuit element comprising an input queue and an output queue; aplurality of cluster queues, each cluster queue comprising an inputqueue and an output queue; a plurality of full interconnect busses, eachfull interconnect bus of the plurality of full interconnect bussescoupling every output queue to every input queue within a correspondingregion of the circuit cluster; wherein any data operation performed by acomposite circuit element, any data word transfer through a clusterqueue, any data word transfer over the first full interconnect bus, anydata word transfer over the configuration and control bus, and any dataword transfer between a first communication circuit and a firstmessage-repeater circuit over the message-based interconnect bus, iscompleted within a predetermined unit time interval which is independentof application placement, application data routing, and applicationimplementation on the reconfigurable integrated circuit.

In another exemplary embodiment, an integrated circuit comprises: aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; one or more configuration and control registers to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an element controller coupled to the configurable circuit elementand to the one or more configuration and control registers, the elementcontroller to allow loading of a context configuration and execution ofa data operation upon the arrival of input data in thecontext-designated data input queue when the context run status isenabled and the context-designated data output queue has a status toaccept output data.

In various exemplary embodiments, the one or more configuration andcontrol registers further store, for each context of the plurality ofcontexts, a plurality of execution context chaining bits designating alead context and a next context, and wherein the element controllerfurther to sequence execution of a plurality of data operations in anorder determined by the plurality of execution context chaining bits.Also in various exemplary embodiments, the integrated circuit mayfurther comprise: an input controller coupled to the context-designatedinput queue; wherein when the context-designated data input queue doesnot have a status to accept data for the selected context, the inputcontroller is to issue a data deny signal to a source of the input data.Also in various exemplary embodiments, the integrated circuit mayfurther comprise: an output controller coupled to the context-designatedoutput queue; wherein when the output controller receives a data denysignal following a first data broadcast, the output controller at alater time to direct a second data broadcast and issue a data retrysignal.

In an exemplary embodiment, a second circuit may be coupled to theconfiguration and control register, the second circuit to enable the runstatus for each context of the plurality of contexts. In variousexemplary embodiments, the second circuit is a message manager circuitand/or a sequential processor.

In various exemplary embodiments, the element controller further may notallow the data operation to execute unless a condition has been met orunless a state ready status has been enabled.

In an exemplary embodiment, the element controller further may configurethe configurable circuit element for the plurality of data operationsusing the plurality of configuration bits stored in the one or moreconfiguration and control registers, and the one or more configurationand control registers further store, for each context of the pluralityof contexts, a designated data source address and a data source context.

In an exemplary embodiment, the integrated circuit may further comprise:an input controller; wherein the input controller is to compare areceived data source address and source context with thecontext-designated data source address and data source context and, whenthe received data source address and data source context match thecontext-designated data source address and data source context, to allowinput of data into the context-designated input queue. Also in variousexemplary embodiments, the integrated circuit may further comprise: aninput controller; and a full interconnect bus comprising a plurality ofdata lines and a plurality of control lines, the plurality of controllines coupled to the input controller and the plurality of data linescoupled to the plurality of input queues; wherein the input controlleris to compare a data source address and source context broadcast on theplurality of control lines of the full interconnect bus with thecontext-designated data source address and data source context and, whenthe broadcast data source address and data source context match thecontext-designated data source address and data source context, to allowinput of data into the context-designated input queue.

In various exemplary embodiments, the element controller further mayselect a context-designated output of a plurality of outputs of aplurality of configurable circuit elements; may provide for theconfigurable circuit element to execute the data operation using inputdata as a constant; may provide for the configurable circuit element toexecute the data operation only once until a control signal is received;and may generate an interrupt signal. In an exemplary embodiment, theone or more configuration and control registers may further store, foreach context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality of output contextchaining bits designating a lead output context and a next outputcontext, and further comprising: an output controller, the outputcontroller to sequence broadcast of output data in an order determinedby the plurality of output context chaining bits. The one or moreconfiguration and control registers may further store: for a firstcontext of the plurality of contexts, a plurality of output mapping bitsdesignating that a data output broadcast is to be identified as asecond, different context; for each context of the plurality ofcontexts, a plurality of bits designating a merger of input queuecontexts; for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofbits designating a depth of the context-designated input queue.

In various exemplary embodiments, the element controller further mayarbitrate among a plurality of data operations, or among a correspondingplurality of contexts, which are ready for execution, wherein thearbitration is at least one of the following arbitration methods: around-robin, a priority, a most recently executed, a least recentlyexecuted, a scheduled execution, or a concurrent execution. The elementcontroller further may provide for conditional data output based upon aresult of the data operation; and may provide for non-consumption ofinput data for the data operation. The element controller may becomprised of combinatorial logic gates, or combinatorial logic gates anda finite state machine, for example and without limitation.

When the configurable circuit element is a memory circuit element, theelement controller further may provide for a plurality of substantiallyconcurrent memory read and memory write data operations; may provide fora plurality of substantially concurrent read operations from theplurality of data inputs or a plurality of substantially concurrentwrite operations to the plurality of data outputs; and may allowexecution of a memory read or write operation without acontext-designated data input queue and without a context-designateddata output queue.

In various exemplary embodiments, element controller further may:determine whether a selected data input is a context-designated datainput and determine whether a selected data output is acontext-designated data output based upon an occurrence of a conditionor based upon a result of a selected data operation; switch from a firstcontext and allow loading of a second context configuration andexecution of a second context data operation upon the arrival of inputdata in the data input queue designated for the second context; allowloading of the context configuration and execution of a data operationonly upon the arrival of input data in all of the context-designateddata input queues when the context run status is enabled and all of thecontext-designated data output queues have a status to accept outputdata; allow loading of the context configuration and an initialexecution of a data operation and, when input data has not arrived inthe context-designated data input queue, further is to halt a completionof the data operation; may allow a partial execution of a data operationand storage of interim results in a memory; and not allow loading of thecontext configuration and execution of a data operation when the contextrun status is set to suspend, or set to halt, or set to free.

In another exemplary embodiment, an integrated circuit, comprises: aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; at least one configuration and control register to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, a plurality of bits designating adata source address and a data source context, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an input controller to allow input of data into thecontext-designated input queue when a received data source address anddata source context match the context-designated data source address anddata source context; and an element controller coupled to theconfigurable circuit element and to the at least one configuration andcontrol register, the element controller to allow loading of a contextconfiguration and execution of a data operation upon the arrival ofinput data in the context-designated data input queue when the contextrun status is enabled and the context-designated data output has astatus to accept output data.

In another exemplary embodiment, an integrated circuit comprises: aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; at least one configuration and control register to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an input controller coupled to the plurality of input queues, theinput controller is to issue a data deny signal to a source of the inputdata when the context-designated data input queue does not have a statusto accept data for the selected context; an output controller coupled tothe plurality of output queues, and when the output controller receivesa data deny signal following a first data broadcast, the outputcontroller to direct a second data broadcast and issue a data retrysignal at a later time; and an element controller coupled to theconfigurable circuit element and to the at least one configuration andcontrol register, the element controller to allow loading of a contextconfiguration and execution of a data operation upon the arrival ofinput data in the context-designated data input queue when the contextrun status is enabled and the context-designated data output has astatus to accept output data.

In various exemplary embodiments, an integrated circuit comprises: aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; at least one configuration and control register to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an element controller coupled to the configurable circuit elementand to the at least one configuration and control register, the elementcontroller to allow loading of a context configuration and partial orconditional execution of a data operation upon the arrival of input datain the context-designated data input queue when the context run statusis enabled and the context-designated data output queue has a status toaccept output data.

Another exemplary embodiment provides a multi-context configurablememory controller, the multi-context configurable memory controllercouplable to a random access memory, the multi-context configurablememory controller comprising: an input-output data port array comprisinga plurality of input queues and a plurality of output queues; at leastone configuration and control register to store, for each context of aplurality of contexts, a plurality of configuration bits; a configurablecircuit element configurable for a plurality of data operations, eachdata operation corresponding to a context of a plurality of contexts,the plurality of data operations comprising memory address generation,memory write operations, and memory read operations, the configurablecircuit element comprising a plurality of configurable addressgenerators; and an element controller coupled to the configurablecircuit element, the element controller comprising a port arbitrationcircuit to arbitrate among a plurality of contexts having a ready-to-runstatus, and the element controller to allow concurrent execution ofmultiple data operations for multiple contexts having the ready-to-runstatus.

In an exemplary embodiment, the at least one configuration and controlregister further stores, for each context of the plurality of contexts,a plurality of execution context chaining bits designating a leadcontext and a next context, and wherein the element controller furtherto sequence execution of the plurality of data operations in an orderdetermined by the plurality of execution context chaining bits. The atleast one configuration and control register may further store, for eachcontext of the plurality of contexts, a plurality of bits designating atleast one data input queue and at least one data output queue, and theready-to-run status for a selected context of the plurality of contextsmay be determined by a presence of input data in the at least onecontext-designated data input queue, room for output data in the atleast one context-designated data output queue, and a designation of alead context or a next context in the plurality of execution chain bitsof the selected context.

In various exemplary embodiments, when a plurality of contexts having aready-to-run status designate the same output queue of the plurality ofoutput queues or designate a same memory address, the port arbitrationcircuit may provide a round-robin arbitration to select for execution ofa data operation at least one context of the plurality of contextshaving a ready-to-run status.

In various exemplary embodiments, the plurality of configuration bitsstored in the at least one configuration and control register maydesignate, for each context of the plurality of contexts, a read or awrite access, a data structure, and at least one address generator ofthe plurality of address generators. The plurality of configuration bitsstored in the at least one configuration and control register mayfurther designate, for each context-designated address register, aminimum memory address, a maximum memory address, a current memoryaddress, a stride to determine a next memory address, an access count,and a maximum number of accesses to perform for the context, and mayfurther designate for an address generator, for a first-in first out(FIFO) mode of at least two contexts of the plurality of contexts, abase address, a maximum number of words in the FIFO, a read pointer, aread offset, a write pointer, a write offset, a number of valid wordscurrently in the FIFO, and a watermark; and may further designate, for atwo-dimensional address mode, at least two contexts of the plurality ofcontexts and at least two address generators of the plurality of addressgenerators.

In various exemplary embodiments, the plurality of configurable addressgenerators are configurable to provide a plurality of addressing modes.In an exemplary embodiment, the plurality of addressing modes comprisesat least two addressing modes selected from the group consisting of:single word addressing, one-dimensional block addressing,two-dimensional block addressing, memory striping, row skipping, columnskipping, wrap-around, logical partitioning, random access, first-infirst out (FIFO), externally generated addressing input through an inputqueue of the plurality of input queues, look up table (LUT) mode, andcombinations thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the element controllerfurther is to generate a done status or tag following a read or write ofa last word of a one-dimensional or two-dimensional data block.

In another exemplary embodiment, the multi-context configurable memorycontroller may further comprise a memory bank interface couplable to therandom access memory, the memory bank interface comprising a pluralityof memory interface circuits, each memory interface circuit couplable toa separate block of the memory and comprising an address input, a datainput, a write enable input, and a data output. The memory bankinterface may further comprise address pattern generation logiccircuitry for memory striping to provide a plurality of concurrentaccesses to the memory.

In another exemplary embodiment, the multi-context configurable memorycontroller may further comprise a plurality of types of data ports; anda memory bank mapping and arbitration circuit to arbitrate among theplurality of types of data ports for access to the memory using a fixedpriority and further using a round-robin priority. The memory bankmapping and arbitration circuit further may generate a wait signal toany data port which was not selected in a memory access arbitration, andmay detect a collision or a contention for a memory access to a selectedmemory bank of a plurality of banks of the random access memory.

In an exemplary embodiment, the memory bank mapping and arbitrationcircuit is coupled through a first data port of the plurality of dataport types to a sequential processor for an instruction read operationfrom the memory, a memory write operation, and a memory read operationby the sequential processor; further coupled through a second data portof the plurality of data port types to a message manager circuit for amemory write operation, a memory read operation, and remote addressgeneration by the message manager circuit; further coupled through athird data port of the plurality of data port types to the messagemanager circuit for memory read operations for message generationdirectly by the message manager circuit without use of the sequentialprocessor. The memory bank mapping and arbitration circuit further mayarbitrate among memory access using a fixed priority among the messagemanager circuit, the input-output port array, and the sequentialprocessor, and further to use a round-robin priority for the pluralityof output queues of the input-output port array. The concurrentexecution of multiple data operations generally are mapped by a memorybank interface to a plurality of separate and non-overlapping physicalblocks of memory.

In another exemplary embodiment, a multi-context configurable memorycontroller is coupled to a random access memory, with the multi-contextconfigurable memory controller comprising: an input-output data portarray comprising a plurality of input queues and a plurality of outputqueues; a configurable circuit element configurable for a plurality ofdata operations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts, the plurality of data operations comprisingmemory address generation, memory write operations, and memory readoperations; the configurable circuit element comprising a plurality ofconfigurable address generators configurable for a plurality ofaddressing modes; at least one configuration and control register tostore, for each context of a plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits designating a read or a write access, a datastructure, at least one address generator of the plurality ofconfigurable address generators and an address of a logical block ofmemory; an element controller coupled to the configurable circuitelement, the element controller to allow concurrent execution ofmultiple data operations for multiple contexts having a ready-to-runstatus; and a memory bank interface coupled to the random access memory,the memory bank interface to map the concurrent execution of multipledata operations to a plurality of separate and non-overlapping physicalblocks of the memory.

In another exemplary embodiment, a multi-context configurable memorycontroller is couplable to a random access memory, with themulti-context configurable memory controller comprising: an input-outputdata port array comprising a plurality of input queues and a pluralityof output queues; a plurality of data ports, the plurality of data portshaving different data port types; at least one configuration and controlregister to store, for each context of a plurality of contexts, aplurality of configuration bits designating a read or a write access, adata structure, and at least one address generator of a plurality ofaddress generators; a configurable circuit element configurable for aplurality of data operations, each data operation corresponding to acontext of a plurality of contexts, the plurality of data operationscomprising memory address generation, memory write operations, andmemory read operations; the configurable circuit element comprising theplurality of address generators configurable to provide a plurality ofaddressing modes, the plurality of addressing modes comprising at leasttwo addressing modes selected from the group consisting of: single wordaddressing, one-dimensional block addressing, two-dimensional blockaddressing, memory striping, row skipping, column skipping, wrap-around,logical partitioning, random access, first-in first out (FIFO),externally generated addressing input through an input queue of theplurality of input queues, look up table (LUT) mode, and combinationsthereof; a memory bank mapping and arbitration circuit to arbitrateamong the plurality of data ports for access to the memory using a fixedpriority; and an element controller coupled to the configurable circuitelement, the element controller comprising a port arbitration circuitand to arbitrate among a plurality of contexts having a ready-to-runstatus using a round-robin priority, and the element controller to allowconcurrent execution of multiple data operations for multiple contextshaving the ready-to-run status.

In various exemplary embodiments, the multi-context configurable memorycontroller comprises: an input-output data port array comprising aplurality of input queues and a plurality of output queues; a pluralityof data ports, the plurality of data ports having different data porttypes; at least one configuration and control register to store, foreach context of a plurality of contexts, a plurality of configurationbits designating a read or a write access, a data structure, and atleast one address generator of a plurality of address generators; aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts, the plurality of data operations comprisingmemory address generation, memory write operations, and memory readoperations; the configurable circuit element comprising the plurality ofaddress generators configurable to provide a plurality of addressingmodes, the plurality of addressing modes comprising at least twoaddressing modes selected from the group consisting of: single wordaddressing, one-dimensional block addressing, two-dimensional blockaddressing, memory striping, row skipping, column skipping, wrap-around,logical partitioning, random access, first-in first out (FIFO),externally generated addressing input through an input queue of theplurality of input queues, look up table (LUT) mode, and combinationsthereof; a memory bank mapping and arbitration circuit to arbitrateamong the plurality of data ports for access to the memory using a fixedpriority; an element controller coupled to the configurable circuitelement, the element controller comprising a port arbitration circuitand to arbitrate among a plurality of contexts having a ready-to-runstatus using a round-robin priority, and the element controller to allowconcurrent execution of multiple data operations for multiple contextshaving the ready-to-run status; and a memory bank interface to map theconcurrent execution of multiple data operations to a plurality ofseparate and non-overlapping physical blocks of memory.

These and additional embodiments are discussed in greater detail below.Numerous other advantages and features of the present invention willbecome readily apparent from the following detailed description of theinvention and the embodiments thereof, from the claims and from theaccompanying drawings.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The objects, features and advantages of the present invention will bemore readily appreciated upon reference to the following disclosure whenconsidered in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and exampleswhich form a portion of the specification, wherein like referencenumerals are used to identify identical components in the various views,and wherein reference numerals with alphabetic characters are utilizedto identify additional types, instantiations or variations of a selectedcomponent embodiment in the various views, in which:

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating, at a high or conceptual level,resiliency of an exemplary apparatus embodiment in accordance with theteachings of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary first apparatusembodiment in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary second apparatusembodiment in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 4, divided into FIGS. 4A and 4B, is a diagram illustrating anexemplary data message and message bus protocol in accordance with theteachings of the present invention.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a first exemplary circuit clusterin accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a second exemplary circuitcluster in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a third exemplary circuit clusterin accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail a firstexemplary composite circuit element within an exemplary circuit clusterin accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of an exemplary multiplier configurableelement in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram of an exemplary triple-ALU configurableelement in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating at a high level an exemplarycompilation process in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention.

FIG. 12 is a flow diagram illustrating at a high level an exemplaryoperating system or process in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating exemplary combinational logiccircuitry for context availability determination within an exemplaryapparatus in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 14, divided into FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B, FIG. 14C and FIG. 14D, is aflow diagram illustrating an exemplary algorithm or symbolic netlistrun-time binding process in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention.

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a first exemplary re-assignmentand re-binding process in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention.

FIG. 16, divided into FIGS. 16A, 16B and 16C, is a diagram illustratingan exemplary configuration and control word in accordance with theteachings of the present invention.

FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating exemplary combinational logiccircuitry for context readiness determination within an exemplaryapparatus in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a fourth exemplary circuitcluster in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary third apparatusembodiment in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating a fifth exemplary circuitcluster in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating tiling of a plurality of circuitclusters to form a supercluster circuit in accordance with the teachingsof the present invention.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating tiling of a plurality ofsupercluster circuits to form a matrix circuit in accordance with theteachings of the present invention.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating successive interconnectionlevels in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating successive interconnectionlevels in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail a secondexemplary composite circuit element within an exemplary circuit clusterin accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary cluster queue inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplaryfull interconnect bus and protocol within an exemplary circuit zone inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplaryfull interconnect bus within an exemplary circuit zone and coupling toadjacent zones through a plurality of cluster queues in accordance withthe teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating first exemplary zone timingisolation between adjacent zones.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating second exemplary zone timingisolation between adjacent zones.

FIG. 31 is a block and timing diagram illustrating exemplary unit delaytiming in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail exemplaryinterconnections between and among selected circuit components in acircuit cluster in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention.

FIG. 33, divided into FIGS. 33A and 33B, is a block diagram illustratingin greater detail an exemplary memory channel and protocol within anexemplary circuit cluster in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention.

FIG. 34, divided into FIGS. 34A and 34B, is a block diagram illustratingin greater detail an exemplary masterless messaging channel and protocolwithin an exemplary circuit cluster in accordance with the teachings ofthe present invention.

FIG. 35, divided into FIGS. 35A, 35B, 35C and 35D, is a block diagramillustrating in greater detail an exemplary instruction data bus orchannel and protocol within an exemplary circuit cluster in accordancewith the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 36, divided into FIGS. 36A and 36B, is a block diagram illustratingin greater detail an exemplary configuration and control bus or channeland protocol within an exemplary circuit cluster in accordance with theteachings of the present invention.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymemory composite circuit element within an exemplary circuit cluster inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymessage manager circuit in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

While the present invention is susceptible of embodiment in manydifferent forms, there are shown in the drawings and will be describedherein in detail specific examples and embodiments thereof, with theunderstanding that the present disclosure is to be considered as anexemplification of the principles of the invention and is not intendedto limit the invention to the specific examples and embodimentsillustrated, and that numerous variations or modifications from thedescribed embodiments may be possible and are considered equivalent. Inthis respect, before explaining at least one embodiment consistent withthe present invention in detail, it is to be understood that theinvention is not limited in its application to the details ofconstruction and to the arrangements of components set forth above andbelow, illustrated in the drawings, or as described in the examples.Methods, systems and apparatuses consistent with the present inventionare capable of other embodiments and of being practiced and carried outin various ways. Also, it is to be understood that the phraseology andterminology employed herein, as well as the abstract included below, arefor the purposes of description and should not be regarded as limiting.

As indicated above, the exemplary embodiments provide an integratedcircuit architecture which is scalable and repeatable. Exemplaryembodiments provide for “unit delay” timing within isochronous zones andfor unit delay timing between zones and from point-to-point throughoutthe entire architecture. As a consequence, timing closure is known andrepeatable once configurations are mapped and bound in the exemplaryapparatus. Exemplary architectures are also scalable and repeatable, upto the practical or physical limits of an IC fabrication technology.

Exemplary embodiments are also “data driven”, in which incoming data isutilized to control execution of operations. Highly novel in data flowarchitectures, the exemplary embodiments provide for a high degree ofcontrol of data flow operations, including partial execution,conditional execution, execution ordering, and data output ordering. Inaddition, exemplary embodiments also utilize a “back pressure” tooptimize use of resources and provide data integrity.

Other illustrated embodiments provide circuitry, communication andcontrol which allows and provides for on-chip configurationcapabilities, including reconfiguration and partial reconfigurationduring run-time.

Exemplary embodiments are also illustrated for configurable memorycontrol which allows multi-threaded and multi-context execution,allowing multiple concurrent read and write operations directly from aconfigurable full interconnect communication channel.

The exemplary embodiments provide an integrated circuit architecturecapable of virtually guaranteeing timing isolation between userapplications. The architecture comprises zones 201 isolated from oneanother by timing isolation components. In some embodiments, thesetiming isolation components are implemented as queues with separateclocks on their input and output sides. When delivering data sourcedfrom within the zone, the zone drives the capture clock; when receivingdata sourced from outside the zone, an outside zone drives the captureclock. This function is similar to a First-In-First-Out (FIFO) queue,but has additional capability related to signal routing and powerisolation.

In other embodiments, a single clock is used for both input and outputcapture, and enable signals are used to provide timing isolation. Whendelivering data sourced from within the zone, the zone drives the writeenables; when receiving data sourced from outside the zone, an outsidezone drives the read enables.

Zones 201 are replicable “tiles” that maintain their timingcharacteristics regardless of array size. Every zone 201 within theapparatus 100, 140 has a single unit-delay for all signals within thezone. Successive hierarchical aggregation of zones 201 adds one unitdelay for each hierarchical level. Timing is always predicated upon theunit delay distance between zones, not on archaic x/y distance orre-powered route calculations.

Function timing isolation within an apparatus 100, 140 is provided bywrapping every function inside a common, unit-delay wrapper, referred toas an element interface and control 280. Each element interface andcontrol 280 (or wrapper) embeds a function of known unit delay withinsequential input/output components that interconnect with each otherthrough a common, bus-width, unit-delay interface.

Context timing isolation within an apparatus 100, 140 is provided threeways: first, by providing each function with multiple contexts; second,by providing a context selection that is a programmable function of datareadiness and third, by providing context selection that is aprogrammable function of function status (e.g. “run,” “suspend,” and“halt”).

Task timing isolation within an apparatus 100, 140 is provided byimplementing a “Task ID” register associated with every context of everyfunction. As used herein, a task is a set of one or more functions, andan apparatus 100, 140 may be concurrently configured with one or moretasks. Once configured, a task may be reconfigured without disturbingother tasks. Such task isolated reconfiguration is accomplished bysending data with the unique ID of the task to be reconfigured. Onlytasks with that ID will respond to the reconfiguration command.

Unit delay timing is enabled within an apparatus 100, 140 by severaluniform, hierarchical interconnect structures: first, message channels;second, configuration channels; and third, dataflow channels. Thesechannels pass through successive hierarchy layers in deterministic andscalable fashion regardless of the number of levels: every levelrepresents a single, unit-delay. Message channels transport bothconfiguration and user messages, and are conveyed by upper hierarchicalnodes (message repeaters 210A or waypoints). Configuration channelstransport both configuration write and read back data and other control.Dataflow channels transport both user data and internal state data. Forexample, in exemplary embodiments, partial reconfiguration is madefeasible and fast by matching the physical and logical addressing forthe interconnect bus 275, 295 and the hierarchical addressing of theclusters 200.

Uniformly sized unit delay function blocks within a device of theinvention permit symmetric arraying without irregular obstruction of theinterconnect channels. This is accomplished by aggregating functions ofsimilar size within a common wrapper and then by arraying these nodesaround a common hierarchical interconnect point. Such an arrangementthen allows for regular tiling with repeatable unit delaycharacteristics.

All these innovative unit delay mechanisms greatly diminish timingclosure complexity and finally make partial reconfiguration in-field apractical reality.

Exemplary embodiments also implement what is referred to herein as “datadomain” multiplexing (“DDM”) in a context-based, configurablearchitecture, to distinguish time-division multiplexing (“TDM”) andfrequency division multiplexing (“FDM”) implementations. In a TDMsystem, within a regularly repeating period, each configuration isallocated a selected, sequential time slot for operation in that period,regardless of other constraints. In an FDM system, each configuration isallocated one or more sequential time slots in that period. In both ofthese cases, however, the data dependencies may not accommodate thecorresponding allotted intervals, with incoming data arriving later orout of phase with the allocated interval for operation of the selectedconfiguration. The selected configuration is then not able to run duringits allocated interval, resulting in considerable idle time and wastedresources.

In contrast, the DDM of the exemplary embodiments is highly efficientand has a pipelining effect. As data arrives, it may be processed by theexecution of any context of a composite circuit element 260, 260A and/ora cluster queue 245 (as long as other conditions precedent have beenmet, such as the context being enabled for execution and having room foroutput data). If there is contention between contexts because more thanone context has input data and room for output data, one context willrun, and the next context will run after that in the next clock cycle,and so on, resulting in a pipeline of data being able to be processed bythe corresponding contexts, regardless of whether its arrival time waswithin in a particular time interval and regardless of any allocation oftime for execution of a configuration. This results in a highlyefficient use of resources, with data driving the execution of contextsand any corresponding configurations needed for the context, rather thanhaving configurations idling in their allotted times while waiting fordata. (There is an additional advantage to DDM. When computations aremapped to different contexts, the contexts can be initially allocated onpercentage bandwidth basis, while unallocated bandwidth can be assignedto unused contexts.)

As indicated above, another novel feature of the IC architecture of thepresent invention is its resiliency, providing adaptation formanufacturing defects, flaws which may arise during usage of the IC, andadaptability for new features, services, algorithms, and other events.The resiliency and robustness of the inventive IC architecture allowsfor increasing yields from IC fabrication, as the inventive ICsfabricated with various defects will nonetheless be quite useable andfully functional.

In addition, during operation, this resiliency may be described as“neural” or biological self-healing, because in the event a portion ofthe IC is damaged or otherwise becomes unusable, another portion of theIC is effectively “recruited” or reassigned to take over and perform thefunctions of the damaged portion. In addition, as discussed in greaterdetail below, as the functions are reassigned, new control and datapathways are also created, so that the transferred operations continueto perform seamlessly with other IC operations. Such adaptive resilienceand self-healing may occur in real-time or near real-time, dependingupon the selected embodiment. This allows the IC to continue to operatewithout disruption provided that sufficient computing resources remainoperational. Such resiliency provides for a graceful degradation ofperformance in the event of damage to the IC, rather than a catastrophicfailure, and is especially significant in health and safetyapplications.

As discussed in greater detail below, several features of the exemplaryembodiments of the present invention enable such resiliency, continuedoperation and eventual graceful degradation. First, the IC or otherdevice is comprised of a plurality of “composite” circuit elements(which comprise various types of computational elements, a uniform I/Ointerface, and a uniform control structure); these composite circuitelements are effectively interchangeable or fungible, such that in theevent of a loss of functionality of an element, its functions can betaken over by another composite circuit element (either identical orsimilar), when available. Second, the plurality of computationalelements is selected to enable the performance of virtually anyfunctionality, that is, they are computationally complete. Third,control functionality is distributed among a plurality of controlcomponents, such as a sequential processing element (SPE) 292 and amessage manager 265 (or, in other embodiments, circuit “cluster”controllers, referred to herein as “state machine elements” 290 or“finite state machine elements”), such that control functionality may betransferred between and among these distributed control elements, as maybe needed. Fourth, the composite circuit elements and/or theirinterconnections may be configurable, to aid in the transfer offunctionality and any corresponding routing of data and control paths.Fifth, all selected operations are assigned and bound within the deviceat the initial run-time, and may be re-assigned and re-boundsubsequently as may be needed to transfer corresponding functionality toother composite circuit elements and continue operations.

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating, at a high or conceptual level, suchresiliency of an exemplary apparatus 100, 140 embodiment in accordancewith the teachings of the present invention. As illustrated in FIG. 1,various parts of the apparatus 100, embodied as an IC, such as variousmatrices 150 illustrated and discussed with reference to FIGS. 2-3, areutilized to perform concurrently a plurality of functions, such as thosewhich may be associated with a typical automobile, other vehicle, orcomputerized or complex system. During time period “α”, an IC portion102 is providing anti-lock braking (ABS) functionality, an IC portion104 is providing traction control functionality, an IC portion 106 isproviding video or other multimedia functionality, and an IC portion 108is providing navigation functionality, such as through a satellite orradio link.

During time period “β”, a region 110 (marked with “X's”) of IC portion102 has become unusable, such as due to physical wear or other damage tothe IC. Such damage may be determined through self-testing or throughother means discussed in greater detail below. As ABS is a high priorityfunction, the functionality performed within region 110 is thenreassigned (or bound) to region 112, which previously had beenperforming video functionality, which has a lower priority for operationin a vehicle environment. As discussed in greater detail below, as partof this reassignment process, new data and control pathways will also becreated, so that the newly assigned regions continue to communicateproperly with other regions of the IC, transparently, as if thereassignment never occurred. Depending upon the nature and scope of thenew functionality assigned to this region, IC portion 106 may or may notcontinue to perform its video functionality, or may perform thisfunctionality with lower bandwidth or speed. In either case, in spite ofdamage to the IC 100, the higher priority ABS functions continue to beoperational, and no catastrophic failure has occurred.

Subsequently, during time period “γ”, regions 114 and 116 (marked with“X's”) of IC portion 108 have become unusable, and their functions arereassigned to regions 118 and 120, respectively. In this case, astraction control (of region 104) generally could have a higher prioritythan the operation of the navigational system, it is likely that region118 was available and not being completely used by the traction controlfunctions (e.g., one or more composite circuit elements and/or contextswere available, as discussed below). As more of the IC has degraded,however, a signal or other indication may be provided to the user, suchas to have the vehicle serviced in the near future for IC replacement,for example. In addition, as mentioned above and as discussed in greaterdetail below, depending upon the availability of target destinations forthe functionality to be reassigned and depending upon how thefunctionality is reassigned, the reassigned functions may no longerperform optimally (e.g., they may be slower or have less bandwidth), butstill perform. Again, such decline in performance is gradual and notcatastrophic, with the capability for ample warnings to be provided.

Subsequently, during time period “δ”, regions 122, 124, 126 and 128(marked with “X's”) of IC portion 104 have become unusable, and theirfunctions are reassigned to regions 132, 138, 134 and 136, respectively.In this case, as traction control (of region 104) generally would have ahigher priority than the operation of the video system of IC portion106, those higher priority functions are reassigned to the unaffectedareas of the IC. In this instance, it is plausible that the videofunctionality could cease entirely, as the remaining usable portions ofthe IC are performing these higher priority functions, such as brakingand traction control. As more of the IC has degraded, however, awarning, signal or other indication also may be provided to the user,such as to have the vehicle serviced immediately for IC replacement, forexample. Again, such decline in performance is gradual and notcatastrophic, with the capability for high priority functions tocontinue to operate, despite significant failures within many portionsof the IC that would cause a prior art IC to fail completely, suddenly,and potentially catastrophically.

The biological parallels in the operation of the apparatus 100 arestriking. As in a biological system which can heal itself, such as aneurological system, in the event of a damage such as a stroke with lossof neurons and corresponding neurological function, other existingneurons are recruited, with new connections (synapses) created, to takeover and restore the functionality previously performed by the damagedneurons. In the case of the apparatus 100, in the event of damage to oneor more parts of the IC, other existing portions of the IC (circuitclusters and composite circuit elements (discussed below)) arerecruited, with new connections created, to take over and restore thefunctionality previously performed by the damaged regions of the IC. Asa consequence, as in a biological system, the apparatus 100 isself-healing, enabling ongoing functionality despite IC damage.

A. Apparatus Architecture

FIGS. 2-3 are block diagrams illustrating, in increasing levels ofdetail, exemplary first and second apparatuses 100, 140 in accordancewith the teachings of the present invention, typically embodied as an ICor portion of an IC. As illustrated, the apparatus 100, 140 is highlydistributed and computationally “flat”, with all computation performedby the plurality of composite circuit elements 260, 260A. An “action” isthe type of function or activity to be performed by a composite circuitelement 260 (through its incorporated computational or other type ofcircuit element 270), such as multiplication or bit manipulation. Asillustrated, there are various types of composite circuit elements 260,illustrated as different types of composite circuit elements(equivalently referred to and abbreviated as “composite elements”(“CE”)) CE_(A), CE_(B), CE_(C), CE_(D), CE_(E), and CE_(M), whichperform different actions and which may be configurable ornon-configurable (illustrated and discussed with reference to FIGS.5-8). The plurality of composite circuit elements 260, with othercircuit structures discussed below, as a first grouping, are groupedinto a corresponding plurality of circuit “clusters” 200. The variousgroupings may also be considered arrays of a plurality of compositecircuit elements 260, at corresponding levels. Various types ofcomposite circuit elements 260, 260A are illustrated, and differprimarily with regard to the number of circuit elements 270 within thecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, and with more detailed controlillustrated for composite circuit elements 260A; accordingly, unlessspecifically indicated to the contrary or the context so requires, anyreference to a composite circuit element 260 should be understood tomean and include a composite circuit element 260A, and vice-versa.

As discussed in greater detail below, in exemplary embodiments, circuitclusters (“clusters”) are further comprised of a plurality of zones 201having the composite circuit elements 260, 260A and cluster queues 245coupled to a full interconnect bus 275, 295, a sequential processor(“SPE”) 292, a message manager 265 coupled to hierarchical interconnect220, and a memory control element (MCE) 485 (which comprises a memorycomposite circuit element 260M and a cluster memory (RAM) 475 (or othercluster memory 255).

The apparatus 100, 140 may then be logically divided into or comprisedof a plurality of levels, with this lower level referred to as a“cluster” level (or a first array), with the plurality of circuitclusters 200 then grouped through various (second) communicationelements 210 and a second channel (or bus structure) 220 into anintermediate level (or a second array), as a second grouping, referredto as a cluster-grouping or “supercluster” level (a plurality ofsuperclusters 185), which in turn are further grouped through various(third) communication elements 190 and third channel (or bus structure)195 into a higher level, as a third grouping, referred to as a “matrix”level (a plurality of matrices 150) or unit level (or a third array),which are further grouped through a fourth channel (or bus structure)160 into the apparatus 100, 140 or device level, as a fourth grouping orarray.

The various communication channels (e.g., busses or bus structures) 160,195, 220 and communication elements 190, 210, 250 collectively may bereferred to and defined as interconnect 155 of the present invention,allowing communication of data and control information between and amongany of the various clusters 200 and other IC components.

Each of the apparatuses 100, 140 typically is embodied as an integratedcircuit, and may be a separate IC or part of a larger system-on-a-chip(“SOC”) or part of a network of ICs, such as coupled to other ICs on acircuit board, wiring network, network mesh, and so on. The twoapparatus embodiments 100, 140 are illustrated as examples and typicallydiffer in the location (and/or type) of the components and number ofcomponents within the various clusters 200, including the componentsutilized to provide input and output (“I/O”) to other, external ornon-integrated ICs or other devices, such as external memory (e.g.,DDR-2) or external communication channels or busses (e.g., PCI orPCI-express (PCI-e)). For apparatus 140, such external I/O has beenconcentrated within a selected matrix 150, while for apparatus 100, suchexternal I/O has been distributed among a plurality of matrices 150. InFIG. 3, a message manager 265 has been utilized to implement a firstcommunication element 250. The clusters 200 may generally also differwith regard to the number and type of composite circuit elements 260; asillustrated in FIGS. 2 and 3, six composite circuit elements 260 areshown, while in other exemplary embodiments, sixteen composite circuitelements 260 are illustrated within a cluster 200, four compositecircuit elements 260 in each zone 201, and with each composite circuitelements 260 comprised of a plurality of configurable elements 270. Allsuch variations are within the scope of the disclosure, and additionalapparatus embodiments are illustrated in FIGS. 18-22, with tilings ofzones 201, clusters 200C, 200D, superclusters 185C, 185D, and so on. Asa consequence, any reference to apparatus 100 will be understood to meanand include the second embodiment illustrated as apparatus 140, andapparatus 140 otherwise will not be further discussed as a separateembodiment. Also, while FIGS. 2 and 3 illustrate two matrices 150, itshould be understood that the apparatus 100, 140 may include one or morematrices 150, and that exemplary embodiments may include any number ofmatrices 150, depending upon selected applications and various designparameters, such as IC area and power requirements.

As discussed in greater detail below, the fundamental computing block ofthe exemplary embodiments is a composite circuit element 260, 260A. Eachcomposite circuit element comprises an element interface 280 and one ormore selected circuit elements 270, which may vary by element type andwhich may be configurable. Many of the composite circuit elements 260,260A consist of configurable element circuitry (270) and haveconfigurable inputs (320) and configurable outputs (315). As describedin greater detail below, composite circuit elements 260, 260A may begrouped into isochronous regions such as zones 201 (and/or clusters 200,depending upon the embodiment), in which all of the composite circuitelements 260, 260A in that region can communicate with each other withina time period less than or equal to a unit time delay (“unit delay”),which may be as fast as a single clock cycle. These adjacent regions mayalso be grouped into larger regions (clusters 200, superclusters 185) inwhich communication between regions also occurs within a unit timedelay. Such adjacent (and diagonally adjacent) regions can also begrouped so that communication with each other occurs within a unit timedelay, such as in a single clock cycle. This hierarchical grouping canbe done to an arbitrary degree until the physical limits of theintegrated circuit, circuit board (or blade), chassis, etc. are reached.

This grouping is accomplished through connections to variouscommunication channels, discussed in detail below. First, at the lowestlevel of grouping within zones 201 and clusters 200, communicationchannels between composite circuit elements 260, 260A are “flat” andnon-hierarchical, using the full interconnect 275, 295 data path, theconfiguration and control bus (CC bus) 285, and cluster queues 245 whichprovide data path coupling between the full interconnect 275, 295 datapaths of adjacent and diagonally adjacent zones 201. Additionally, morespecialized communication channels between selected components within acluster 200 are also described in greater detail below.

Second, beginning at the cluster 200 level, in exemplary embodiments, amessage manager 265 (or first communication element 250) within eachcluster 200 is utilized for the communication to and from clusters 200,coupling to hierarchical interconnect 220, which in turn (through othercommunication elements, 190, 210, such as message repeaters 210A),couples to higher levels of interconnect (195, 170, 180), up to theoverall fabric input and output (I/O) 204 or IC I/O for off chipcommunication.

Referring to FIGS. 2-3, as indicated above, the apparatus 100 islogically divided into or comprised of a plurality of matrices 150. Eachmatrix 150 is coupled through a corresponding plurality of thirdcommunication elements 190 and a fourth communication channel (or busstructure) 160, and each has at least two input and two output data andcontrol paths, separately illustrated as input and output (“I/O”) 170and I/O 180 (of fourth channel (or bus structure) 160). Depending uponthe selected embodiment, the fourth channel (or bus structure) 160 (withI/O 170 and 180) may have combined control and data I/O paths (asillustrated), with data, configuration and control information utilizingthe same bus structures, or such data, configuration and control may beseparated onto different bus or interconnect structures (not separatelyillustrated). In an exemplary embodiment, at this matrix 150 level, sucha plurality of third communication elements 190 are implemented throughexemplary communication circuitry such as message or packet routing ormessage repeater circuitry. In the event of a failure of a thirdcommunication element 190 and/or one of the I/O 170, 180, or anyportions thereof, another third communication element 190 and theremaining I/O 170, 180 are available to provide identical functionality,albeit potentially with a reduction in available communicationbandwidth. In an exemplary embodiment, the third communication elements190 are implemented as a single, combined circuit element having fourindependent up link channels and four independent down link channels(with corresponding bus structures); alternatively, the various channelsmay also be implemented to provide full duplex communication.

In an exemplary embodiment discussed in greater detail below, thecommunication elements (190, 210) utilized through or until the cluster200 level provide message-based routing (i.e., routing and messagerepeating to the addressed destination or another node along the path tothe specified destination), described in greater detail below withreference to FIG. 4, and may be referred to equivalently as messagerepeaters 210A or waypoints. Instead of utilizing a separate firstcommunication element 250, that functionality is included within thefunctions of the message manager 265, described in detail below withreference to FIG. 38.

This use of a plurality of (at least two) communication elements andcorresponding I/O portions of the bus structures (having combinedcontrol and data I/O paths), in exemplary embodiments, is repeated ateach of the various logical, hierarchical levels, providingcorresponding resiliency in the event of a failure of any of the variouscommunication elements or I/O paths. For selected embodiments requiringless resiliency or subject to other constraints, however, such one ormore additional sets of communication elements and corresponding I/O areoptional and may be omitted.

Each matrix 150, in turn, is logically divided into various hierarchicallevels or subgroups, also with circuitry for communication between andamong the various levels, such as the plurality of third communicationelements 190 adapted to perform message or packet-based routing,self-routing, tunneling, or other types of data, configuration andcontrol communication. More specifically, a matrix 150 is logicallydivided into a plurality of superclusters 185, which are coupled to eachother through the plurality of third communication elements 190 andthird channel (or bus structure) 195, and which further are coupled tosuperclusters 185 of other matrices 150 via fourth channel (or busstructure) 160 and other corresponding third communication elements 190.

The superclusters 185, in turn, are logically divided into acorresponding plurality of circuit clusters 200 (abbreviated andreferred to herein simply as “clusters” or a “cluster”), which in turnare comprised of a plurality of circuitry elements referred to ascomposite circuit elements 260 (or, equivalently referred to andabbreviated as “composite elements” (“CE”) 260) and other components(including first communication elements 250 and SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290))discussed below. The communication between and among these variousclusters 200 is provided through a plurality of second communicationelements 210 (which also may provide message or packet-based routing,self-routing, tunneling, or other types of data, configuration andcontrol communication) and a second channel (or bus structure) 220, suchas message repeaters 210A and also message managers 265. In exemplaryembodiments described in greater detail below, clusters 200 are furtherdivided into zones 201. The various clusters 200 within a supercluster185 are then further coupled to other clusters 200 of othersuperclusters 185 of the same or other matrices 150 via second channel(or bus structure) 220, second communication elements 210, third channel(or bus structure) 195, and third communication elements 190, and thento other matrices via fourth channel (or bus structure) 160. Inaddition, as an optional variation, “fast path” connections may beprovided between adjacent clusters, illustrated as connections 215 inFIG. 2, and discussed in greater detail below.

In various exemplary embodiments, one or more state machine elements 290are utilized to perform various functions, such as instructionprocessing and reconfiguration or linking of data paths, for example. Inother exemplary embodiments, such as clusters 200C, 200D, a morepowerful, instruction-based sequential processing element (SPE) 292 isutilized which, for example and without limitation, may be a RISCprocessor or other type of processor or controller. As a consequence,any reference to a state machine element (SME) 290, in the Figures or inthis specification, should be understood to mean and include asequential processing element (SPE) 292, and vice-versa. For example,there may be cluster 200C, 200D implementations that do not require amore powerful processor, and a more limited processing element such as aSME 290 may be substituted within the scope of this disclosure.

Similarly, various communication and management functions have beenco-located within a message manager 265 (discussed in greater detailwith reference to FIG. 38). It should be understood that thefunctionality performed by a message manager 265 may be split up amongvarious components, such as a first communication element 250 and asequential processing element (SPE) 292 or a state machine element 290,for example and without limitation, and all such implementations areconsidered equivalent and within the scope of the disclosure.

The various second and third communication elements 210, 190 and levelsof communication channels (bus structures) 160, 195, 220 collectivelyform an interconnect structure 155 of the present invention. Asindicated above, the second and third communication elements 210, 190may be implemented as known or as becomes known in the art for transfer,routing or switching of data, configuration and control to and fromaddressable clusters 200. The second and third communication elements210, 190 may be implemented as routing elements, self-routing elements,message repeaters, circuit-switched, hybrid routing and circuit-switchedelements, other switch-based communication elements, or other types ofcommunication elements, and are considered equivalent. The variouscommunication channels (bus structures) 160, 195, 220 may be implementedutilizing any conductive paths which may be available in IC fabricationand processing.

In exemplary embodiments, this interconnect 155 (communication channels(bus structures) 160, 195, 220) will generally be “n” bits wide, withthe number “n” selected depending upon the objectives of the selectedembodiment. A protocol and bus structure for an exemplary communicationchannel 170, 180, 195, 220 is illustrated in FIG. 4 and discussed ingreater detail below. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, “n” is 17or more bits, providing for a 16 bit data word and one or more controlor signaling bits. In addition to the interconnect 155 comprising one ormore busses, wires, conductors, transmission media or connectionstructures as illustrated in FIGS. 2-3, the interconnect 155 alsoincludes a plurality of communication elements (190, 210) whichaccommodate the n-bit width and which provide routing or othertransmission for data words (or messages or packets), configurationwords (or messages or packets), and/or control words (or messages orpackets), between and among matrices 150, superclusters 185, andclusters 200. In exemplary embodiments, these communication elements(190, 210) may also provide arbitration or other routing conflictresolution, depending upon the degree of interconnectivity to beprovided.

Within the cluster 200 level, in some exemplary embodiments, the firstcommunication elements 250 provide cluster I/O, providing intra-clustercircuit-based (or circuit-switched) connection capability in addition tointer-cluster data, configuration and control routing, creating directcommunication links or connections to and from components within acluster 200 and data, configuration and control routing from and tocomponents of other clusters 200. In exemplary embodiments, a messagemanager 265 within a cluster 200 or supercluster 185 is also utilized toprovide inter-cluster communication of configuration and control andexternal input and output communication of any type of data,configuration and control, with dedicated full interconnection betweencomposite circuit elements 260 and cluster queues 245 provided by fullinterconnect bus 275, 295.

It should be noted that the selection of the number of levels within theapparatus 100 may be varied in any given embodiment, as a balancing ofthe amount of physical interconnect to be utilized in comparison withrouting complexity, for a given number of computational elements. In theexemplary embodiment, for the same number of composite circuit elements260, the use of four levels (matrix, supercluster, cluster, andcomposite circuit element levels) in comparison to three levels (withmore components per level), for example, enables a substantial reductionin the amount of busses and wires of interconnect, resulting in asavings of area and capacitance, at the expense of additional routingcomplexity.

Continuing to refer to FIGS. 2 and 3, as an option or alternative,depending upon the selected embodiment, one or more additionalcontrollers (or processors, equivalently) 175 may be utilized, at any ofthe various matrix 150, supercluster 185 or cluster 200 levels. Forexample, exemplary embodiments of run-time binding (discussed below withreference to FIG. 14) may utilize such additional controllers 175, mayinstead utilize one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) (discussed below) asone or more controllers, or both. In an exemplary embodiment, thecontroller or processor 175 is implemented utilizing a commerciallyavailable processor or microprocessor, e.g., ARM or Micro-Blaze. Theprocessor 175 also may be in a separate system, or may be integrated aspart of the die of the apparatus 100, 140, etc., and may be any type ofprocessor or controller, or also may be implemented using one or moreSPEs 292 or SMEs 290. In addition, the apparatus 100 (or 140) may alsoinclude other components, such as any other circuits or other deviceswhich may be integrated or coupled with the apparatus, such asradio-frequency or cellular communication circuitry, memory circuitry,processors, microprocessors, etc., with all such variations consideredwithin the scope of the present invention.

As an introduction to the operation of the apparatus 100, datacomputations and manipulations are performed within the plurality ofclusters 200, through composite circuit elements 260. These circuitelements 260 are referred to as “composite” circuit elements 260 becausein the exemplary embodiments, they are comprised of a first, constant orfixed portion, and a second, variable portion, which may be configurableor non-configurable (depending upon the type of composite circuitelement 260). More particularly, each composite circuit element 260 iscomprised of: (1) a uniform or constant element interface and control280, which is the same for every composite circuit element 260; and (2)a selected type of “computational” or other circuit element 270 from aplurality of types of computational elements 270 (configurable ornon-configurable), which are illustrated and discussed in greater detailwith reference to FIGS. 5-8. An additional variation of a compositecircuit element 260, as a composite circuit element 260A, is discussedin greater detail below with reference to FIG. 25.

The computational circuit element 270 (also referred to more simply asan element 270 or circuit element 270) within composite circuit elements260 vary by type and configurability; the computational elements 270 arereferred to as “computational” for ease of reference only, as thevarious types of circuit elements 270 may have functionality which isnot computational in any strict sense, such as memory functions, finitestate machine functions, communication functions, etc. For example, somecircuit elements 270 may be static or configurable computationalelements of a plurality of types, static or configurable memory elementsof a plurality of types, static or configurable communication elementsor interfaces of a plurality of types, static or configurable statemachine elements, and so on, resulting in a plurality of types ofcomposite circuit elements 260, such as configurable composite circuitelements 260, configurable or nonconfigurable memory composite circuitelements 260 _(M), or configurable or nonconfigurable composite I/O orother communication circuit elements 260 (which may provide I/Ointerfaces for external communication, for example). Accordingly, anyreference herein to a composite circuit element 260 will be understoodto mean and include any of the various types, special cases or specificinstances or instantiations of composite circuit elements 260, such asconfigurable composite circuit elements 260, composite circuit elements260A, first communication elements 250, and composite memory elements260 _(M), unless the context requires or indicates otherwise.

Also for example, the first communication elements 250 (cluster I/O) maybe implemented as a type of composite circuit element 260, having anelement interface and control 280 presented to other composite circuitelements 260, and having a computational element 270 designed forcommunication functionality, and which may or may not be configurable.In addition, as discussed below, additional circuitry typically embodiedas a “message manager” circuit 265 is provided within various orselected clusters 200 to perform communication functions, such asmessaging over interconnect 220; in other exemplary embodiments, amessage manager 265 may be utilized to provide communication interfacesto external memory, busses and communication systems, e.g., providinginterfaces which comply with various communication and other datatransfer standards, and may also include interfaces for communicationwith other portions of an IC when the apparatus 100 is embodied as partof an SOC. For example, depending upon the selected embodiment, amessage manager 265 (as dedicated hardware) or a composite circuitelement 260 (having a computational element 270 adapted for acommunication function) may be utilized for such external communication,such as providing an Ethernet interface, a PCI interface, a PCI Expressinterface, a USB or USB2 interface, a DDR SDRAM interface or other typeof memory interface, a wireless interface, an interface to another IC,and so on. In exemplary embodiments, the message manager may also beutilized for communication within the apparatus 100, such ascommunication between clusters 200 and communication between SPEs 292(or SMEs 290), as discussed in greater detail below, such as forconfiguration and control messaging.

In other exemplary embodiments, external communication (such as forDDR-2, PCI, PCI-e) is provided by other components coupled to theinterconnect 155, and the message manager circuit 265 provides forinterfacing between stream-based communication within a supercluster 185and/or cluster 200 and message or packet-based communication on theinterconnection networks 220, 195, 160, 170, 180, essentially replacingthe first and/or second communication elements 250, 210, such as insupercluster 185C and cluster 200C embodiments. In this embodiment, themessage manager circuit 265 may also be implemented as combinationallogic gates or as a finite state machine or as a state machine inconjunction with various combinational logic gates, and the messagemanager circuit 265 processes three kinds of messages: incomingmessages, outgoing acknowledgements, and outgoing messages, all viainterconnect 220 (155). Two types of messages are utilized, Data Writemessages, and Data Copy messages. Data Write messages cause the payloaddata in the message to be written to an address specified in themessage. Data Write messages, for example, may be user task writes,writes to second memory element 255, or writes over theconfiguration/control bus 285, such as for writing to the SPE 292 (orSME 290) and modifying SPE 292 (or SME 290) executable code, or writesto configure any composite circuit element 260 within a cluster 200. Inthis embodiment, also for example, the message manager circuit 265 maywrite to the SPE 292 (or SME 290), to provide SPE 292 (or SME 290)control. Data Copy messages cause a Data Write message to be sent from aspecified source address to a specified destination address. Outgoingacknowledgements are generated by the message manager circuit 265 inresponse to an incoming Data Write message requesting a reply, and arethemselves Data Write messages. Outgoing messages are assembled in thesecond memory element 255 (e.g., cluster 200 RAM 255, 475) by the SPE292 (or SME 290) and are then transmitted by the message manager circuit265, such as by setting a pointer to the start of the message andspecifying the message size. The message assembly may be applicable tooutgoing messages which do not require acknowledgment or extended tothose which do require acknowledgment. Such messaging is discussed ingreater detail below.

In an exemplary embodiment, the second memory element 255 (or memory475) forming cluster 200 RAM is implemented as eight 1K times 16 blocks,with address generators provided within the memory-type compositecircuit element 260 _(M), rather than use of the SPE 292 (or SME 290)for address generation. An additional register is also utilized, whichif set, reserves the memory-type composite circuit element 260 _(M) foruse by the SPE 292 (or SME 290), such as for storing instruction sets,and which if not set, enables use by other composite circuit elements260. Address generation may include, for example, FIFO, block read/write(including counting and striding), and 2-D or 3-D address generation.The second memory element 255 also could be a hierarchical memory withor without paged or cached memory structures. Priority for data inputinto the second memory element 255 is typically the message managercircuit 265, to avoid data back ups on the interconnect 155, thememory-type composite circuit element 260 _(M), followed by the SPE 292(or SME 290). The memory-type composite circuit element 260 _(M) hasadditional features, such as being synchronous, and further allowingmultiple processes/contexts to execute simultaneously (as long as thereis no data collision).

In another exemplary embodiment, the message manager circuit 265 is alsoconfigured or adapted to manage the memory-type composite circuitelements 260 _(M) distributed throughout the apparatus 100. For example,the message manager circuit 265 is adapted to provide a uniform addressspace for the distributed plurality of memory composite circuitelements. Through this use of the message manager circuit 265, thedistributed plurality of memory-type composite circuit elements 260appears to the other composite circuit elements 260 and may be managedas one large memory array.

Each of the configurable computational elements 270 are comprised ofcombinational logic (i.e., a group of logic gates forming a functionalunit, such as an adder, a multiplier, arithmetic logic unit (“ALU”)etc.) having input, output, and other internal connections which areadapted to be changeable or are otherwise capable of being modified.More specifically, each configurable computational element 270 isdesigned such that its logic gates or other functional units may becoupled or connected (or decoupled or disconnected), through switchingcircuits, elements or other switching structures such as switches,multiplexers, demultiplexers, pass transistors, crossbar switches,routing elements, or other transistor configurations, in any of aplurality of ways, to perform a corresponding plurality of functions.Each different way of connecting the various gates (or functional units)is a “configuration”, and a selected configuration may be represented asa plurality of bits which control the corresponding switches,multiplexers, demultiplexers, pass transistors, or other transistors orswitching arrangements, creating the specific connections of theselected configuration. For example, adders, multipliers and registersmay be coupled in any number of various ways to perform a wide varietyof functions, from simple arithmetic to discrete cosine transformation.In other circumstances, a configuration may also indicate how input datais to be interpreted or used, such as signed or unsigned, a constant ora variable, consumable or non-consumable, etc. Other types ofconfigurations and ways of configuring are known in the electronic arts,are considered equivalent and within the scope of the present invention.

Each of the available or selected configurations for a configurablecomputational element 270 is stored locally within a memory of theelement interface and control 280 of the composite circuit element 260.As discussed in greater detail below, each of these configurations, inconjunction with other information such as selected inputs, outputdestinations and control information is defined as or comprises acorresponding “context”. For example, the same configuration of elementsmay have multiple contexts, with each context using different inputs andproviding outputs to different locations, or utilizing differentconstants. Also for example, different configurations will also providedifferent contexts, even if the different configurations will utilizethe same inputs and provide outputs to the same destinations. Theoperations and control of composite circuit elements 260 is discussed ingreater detail below with reference to FIGS. 5-8 and 16, following thediscussion of the internal and external communication and addressingutilized in exemplary embodiments of the invention.

In exemplary embodiments, the various connections between compositecircuit elements 260 within a cluster 200, and routing or tunneling fromone cluster to another (via communication elements 250, 210, or 190),are established at run-time by the operating system of the apparatus100, for implementation of a selected program, algorithm or function. Inaddition, such connections may change over time, and depending upon theselected embodiment, generally will change over time as may be needed,as briefly discussed above with reference to FIG. 1 and as discussed ingreater detail below, for creation of new functionality, changingcontexts and configurations, changing functionality, or resilientself-healing. In alternative embodiments within the scope of theinvention, such as for applications which may not be subject torequirements for resiliency, the various connections also may beestablished prior to run-time and maintained in a memory within theapparatus 100, with the potential for subsequent modification as may benecessary or desirable.

Referring to FIGS. 2 and 3, a matrix 150 is logically divided into orcomprises a plurality of superclusters 185 and one or more thirdcommunication elements 190. The third communication elements 190 arecommunication circuitry (e.g., routers, message repeaters, gateways,switches, or tunneling devices) which provide message or packet routing,switching, hybrid routing and switching, or tunneling of data andcontrol into and out of a matrix 150, for communication of data,configuration and control information, and may be considered to formpart of interconnect 155. The third communication elements 190 may alsobe considered message repeaters or gateways, and are one of severalcommunication structures utilized in accordance with the presentinvention. In a first selected embodiment utilizing at least two or morethird communication elements 190, each third communication element 190is coupled to each supercluster 185 of a selected matrix 150 and toother third communication elements 190 (via bus structure 160), suchthat communication to and from each supercluster 185 may occur througheither third communication element 190. As a result, in the event of afailure of any one of the third communication elements 190, anotherthird communication element 190 is available to each supercluster 185 ofa selected matrix 150 to provide identical communication functionality.While illustrated as separate third communication elements 190, it willbe understood that these independent circuits may be combined into oneor more larger circuit structures providing the same independentcommunication function. For example, in a selected embodiment, a singlethird communication element 190 is utilized, similarly connected to eachsupercluster 185 and to other third communication elements 190, witheach third communication element 190 providing multiple and independentcommunication pathways (e.g., 4 down links and 4 up links), such thatadditional links are available in the event of failure of one or morelinks. Again, in the event of such a failure, significant functionalityis preserved, with graceful degradation and not catastrophic failure.

Each supercluster 185 is further logically divided into or comprises aplurality of clusters 200 and one or more second communication elements210. The second communication elements 210 are also communicationcircuitry which provide message or packet routing, tunneling, switchingor other transfer of data and control into and out of a supercluster185, for communication of data, configuration and control information,and also may be considered to form part of interconnect 155. The secondcommunication elements 210 also may also be considered message repeatersor gateways, and are one of several communication structures utilized inaccordance with the present invention. In a first selected embodimentutilizing at least two second communication elements 210, each secondcommunication element 210 is coupled to each cluster 200 of a selectedsupercluster 185, such that communication to and from each cluster 200may occur through either second communication element 210. Also as aresult, in the event of a failure of a second communication element 210,another second communication element 210 is available to each cluster200 of a selected supercluster 185 to provide identical communicationfunctionality. In a selected embodiment, these independent circuits maybe combined into one or more larger circuit structures providing thesame independent communication function. Also for example, a single,combined second communication element 210 is utilized, similarlyconnected to each cluster 200 and to one or more third communicationelements 190. In this embodiment, each second communication element 210provides multiple and independent communication pathways (e.g., 4 downlinks and 4 up links), such that additional links are available in theevent of failure of one or more links. Again, in the event of such afailure, significant functionality is preserved, with gracefuldegradation and not catastrophic failure.

As a consequence, moving from a matrix 150 level to a supercluster 185level and to a cluster 200 level, the interconnect 155 provides messageor packet routing, self-routing, tunneling, switching or other transferof data, configuration and control information through a plurality ofcommunication elements 190 and 210 and communication channels (busstructures) 160, 195, 220. In addition, as discussed below, within acluster 200, the interconnect 155 also provides circuit-switched (orcircuit-based) communication, through first communication elements 250.Indeed, one of the novel features of the architecture of the presentinvention is the use of an interconnect structure 155 providing bothmessage or packet-based and circuit-switched communication.

Continuing to refer to FIGS. 2 and 3, the exemplary interconnect 155comprises: (1) a plurality of routing (tunneling, message repeater orgateway) elements, namely, a plurality of third communication elements190, a plurality of second communication elements 210, and a pluralityof first communication elements 250; (2) a plurality of circuitswitching elements, namely, the plurality of first communicationelements 250; and (3) their corresponding busses, wires or other formsof physical connections or date transmission media (e.g., illustrated,for example, as busses or wires 160, 195 and 220 which, as discussedabove, are “n” bits wide). Within a matrix 150, one or more thirdcommunication elements 190 provide message or packet routing,self-routing, tunneling, switching or other transfer of data,configuration and control information, to and from other matrices 150(via first bus 160 and I/O 170, 180), and to and from a plurality ofsuperclusters 185, via one or more second communication elements 210within each such supercluster 185. In turn, one or more secondcommunication elements 210 within such a supercluster 185 providesmessage or packet routing, self-routing, tunneling, switching or othertransfer of data, configuration and control information, to and from thethird communication elements 190, and to and from a plurality ofclusters 200 within the supercluster 185, via one or more firstcommunication elements 250 within each such cluster 200.

In turn, the one or more first communication elements 250 within acluster 200 provides message or packet routing, self-routing, tunneling,switching or other transfer of data, configuration and controlinformation to and from the cluster 200, via the second communicationelements 210, such as to and from other clusters 200, and providescircuit-switched communication for data and control within the cluster200, enabling communication between other clusters 200 and the compositecircuit elements 260, SPE 292 (or SME 290), message manager 265, memoryelements 255 and/or other components within the cluster 200. Forexample, data produced from a composite circuit element 260 within acluster 200 may be output through a direct or a circuit-switchedconnection to one of the plurality of first communication elements 250,which then converts the data to message or packet form and routes thedata message or packet to the second communication element 210, fortransmission to another cluster 200, another supercluster 185, oranother matrix 150. Similarly, when a data message or packet arrives viaa second communication element 210, which may be from another cluster200, another supercluster 185, or another matrix 150, the firstcommunication element 250 extracts the data and transfers the one ormore data words to the corresponding composite circuit element 260, SPE292 (or SME 290), memory elements 255 or other components within thecluster 200.

These various communication elements (third communication elements 190,second communication elements 210, first communication elements 250, thefull interconnect 275 and the distributed full interconnect 295discussed below) may be designed to have any selected capacity, such asfull interconnectivity to more limited interconnectivity. For example,instead of the full interconnect 275 or the distributed fullinterconnect 295 providing for any output of a composite circuit element260 to be coupled concurrently to any input of a composite circuitelement 260 in the exemplary embodiments (with the exception ofconflicts or contentions for the same inputs or outputs), more limitedor partial interconnections within the cluster 200 may be provided, suchas by using a partial interconnect element or a distributed partialinterconnect element (not separately illustrated). Also for example, inexemplary embodiments, the first communication elements 250 may provide2 or more concurrent connections or routing, such as two up links to andtwo down links from second communication elements 210, in addition toone or more concurrent connections to and from the composite circuitelements 260 and other components of a cluster 200. More connectivitymay also be provided in any given embodiment, as a trade-off ofpotential collisions with IC area. In addition, where less than fullinterconnectivity is provided, the various communication elements (thirdcommunication elements 190, second communication elements 210, and firstcommunication elements 250) may also provide an arbitrationfunctionality, which may be based on priority, round robin, sequential,etc., selecting a connection or routing for data transfer at any giventime.

While illustrated having cluster 200, supercluster 185, matrix 150 andapparatus 100 levels, it will be understood by those of skill in the artthat the number of levels may be extended or decreased in any selectedembodiment. For example, a plurality of fourth communication elements(not illustrated), with the other interconnect 155, may be utilized tocreate another level of hierarchy within the apparatus 100, and so on,creating any selected number of levels within the hierarchy of theapparatus 100.

FIG. 4, divided into FIGS. 4A and 4B, is a diagram illustrating anexemplary data transmission message structure 310 and message busstructure 309 in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.The interconnect 170, 180, 195 and 220 (collectively interconnect 155),in exemplary embodiments, are message channels using the protocol (datatransmission message structure 310) illustrated in FIG. 4A and havingthe message bus structure 309 illustrated in FIG. 4B, and transportdata, configuration, and control messages (in payload 307). In theexemplary embodiments, data, configuration and/or control messages (orpackets) are routed over the interconnect 155 by the various routingelements such as message managers 265 and message repeater (or waypoint)circuits 210A (third communication elements 190, second communicationelements 210, and first communication elements 250) as a “message”consisting of one or more data words 310 transmitted (or repeated in aspecified order sequentially), also referred to as “train” or tunnelingof data words, thereby reducing addressing overhead which wouldotherwise be associated with routing of individually addressed datawords (which are typically referred to as “packets”, and which may betransmitted and received in any order and through different routes).

More specifically, referring to FIG. 4A, a data transmission sequence(or message) is of variable length and is comprised of one or more words(fields or data structures) 310, divided into “strobes” 301, “tags” 302,and a payload 307 consisting of a destination address header 305 and/ordata 306, and is “n” bits wide, corresponding to the bit width of themessage channel utilized, such as interconnect 155 (170, 180, 195 and220). In an exemplary embodiment, for example, the interconnect 155comprises a message bus 309, with each line or wire corresponding to abit of the message (i.e., strobe lines 311, tag lines 313, andpayload/data lines 317), and in an exemplary embodiment, has a width oftwenty bits. Each such word 310 is transmitted sequentially, in order,one after the other, on the interconnect 155. The first field, typicallythe first two bits in an exemplary embodiment, is the strobes field 301,and is a notification of a request (data is available) or an acceptance(an acknowledgement or ACK), and is used to notify the recipient ofincoming data on detecting an edge and to notify a sender of the receiptof data, respectively (providing a handshake mechanism). The next field,typically the next two bits in an exemplary embodiment, is the tagsfield 302, which indicates the location of the address header 305 andthe first, middle, and last words of data. The next field, typically thenext sixteen bits in an exemplary embodiment, is the payload 307, whichmay consist of an address header or data (which will be differentiatedfrom each other using the tags field 302). An address header may be adestination address (which may require more than one word), or maycomprise both a destination address and a source address (which also mayrequire more than one word), and also indicates that all subsequent datawords are to be routed to the same addressed destination, automatically,without any need for separate or additional addressing for each dataword (in contrast to packet switching). When the payload 307 consists ofdata words 306, the first data word, the middle data words, and then thelast data word, will be designated as such by the tags field 302, sothat the recipient knows when the last data word has arrived.

Such an address header 305, in the exemplary embodiments, has the formof [IC number, matrix number, supercluster number, cluster number, zonenumber], with the number of bits utilized to designate the addressdependent upon the number of ICs, matrices 150, superclusters 185,clusters 200 and zones 201 implemented in the selected embodiment.Sixteen bits are allotted for addressing in an exemplary embodiment,although fewer may actually be needed. It should also be noted that assuch a message comes in to any of the communication elements (e.g., 190,210, 250, 265) as successive words, the communication elements maycommence processing the message and further transmission of the incomingdata before the entire message has been received, allowing for morecontinuous data movement, such as transferring the data payload to thefull interconnect 275, 295 or to cluster memory (RAM) 475.

Such an interconnect 155 which provides message-based transport of anykind of data, including both application data and configuration data,along with point-to-point communications within the apparatus 100, 140,is highly new and novel.

This message-based data transmission may be implemented in any ofvarious ways, such as in an exemplary embodiment as a combination orhybrid of both message or packet routing and circuit switching. Moreparticularly, the various routing elements (third communication elements190 and second communication elements 210) provide for establishing oneor more connections between and among clusters 200 using the addressheader of the first word or field 305, and reserving and setting up adedicated path from a source cluster 200 to a destination cluster 200.The dedicated path may be formed by circuit-switching or otherconnections within, for example, a message repeater 210A or gateway. Theremaining data words arriving at the communication element (thirdcommunication elements 190, second communication elements 210), may bebuffered and then transferred automatically as a message on the switchedor other dedicated path established within the communication elementusing the address header. The dedicated path is maintained until thecomplete message has been transmitted, after which the various pathelements are released for other communications. A plurality of paths maybe used concurrently to support a broadcast mode. Also in the exemplaryembodiment, a plurality of such data transmissions may occurconcurrently between and among the same communication elements, such asby using the four uplinks and four downlinks previously mentioned for anexemplary embodiment, allowing transmission of multiple data streamsconcurrently. As a consequence, in the exemplary embodiments, theplurality of communication elements (including the first communicationelements 250) support any selected mode of communication, such asone-to-one input and output data links, one-to many (broadcast) datalinks, and many-to-one data links

In contrast, a first communication element 250 (typically implemented ina message manager 265) receives data words from the various componentsof the cluster 200, typically sequentially (generally one data word perclock cycle or other unit time delay) via the full interconnect 275,295, provides an address header, and transmits the sequence to a secondcommunication element 210 (typically a message repeater 210A) fortransmission to another cluster 200, supercluster 185 or matrix 150,generally transmitting the entire sequence as a message (packet burst).For data from other clusters 200, the first communication element 250receives and buffers the plurality of data words or stores them inmemory (e.g., a memory composite circuit element (MEMU) 260M), andsequentially provides them to the designated component of the cluster200, typically via the switching or dedicated lines of the fullinterconnect 275. In exemplary embodiments, the source and/ordestination addresses may be stored in any of a plurality of components,such as within any of the various routing elements (third communicationelements 190, second communication elements 210, and first communicationelements 250), and established during the binding process (discussedbelow) for each context utilizing message-based interclustercommunication (rather than using a cluster queue 245).

More particularly, the one or more sequential processing elements (SPEs)292 or state machine elements (“SMEs”) 290 (or other controller(s) 175or off-chip controller(s) or processor(s)) performing the bindingprocess (the “binder”) assigns actions (i.e., functions or contexts) tothe various composite circuit elements 260, and establishes a “virtual”data linkage or routing between or among the composite circuit elements260, namely, assigning a data linkage between one or more compositecircuit elements 260, without necessarily specifying how that datalinkage is to physically occur. The various communication elements(first communication element 250, second communication elements 210,third communication elements 190, full interconnect 275 and/ordistributed full interconnect 295), either clock cycle-by-cycle or atany given time, then are adapted to determine the physical route for thecorresponding data transfer, creating the physical data linkage. Forexample, via switching and/or routing, a first physical data path orlink between or within communication elements may be established for oneinstance of a transfer of a data packet (e.g., a train of data words)between two clusters 200 (and subsequently released), with a differentphysical data path or link established for a subsequent instance of atransfer of a data packet between the two clusters 200. Such physicaldata links may be stored and maintained, for example, within the variousmemories within the communication elements, such as stored as a routingtable within the memories of the corresponding element interface andcontrol 280 (discussed below), with any selected physical data linkdetermined by the corresponding element controller 325 of thecommunication composite circuit element 260. Similarly, at any instantin time or clock cycle, different physical data links may be established(and released) for data communication within the cluster 200. In otherexemplary embodiments, rather than establishing a virtual data link, thephysical data linkages may also be established by the binder as part ofthe binding process.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a first exemplary cluster 200 inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention. FIG. 6 is ablock diagram illustrating a second exemplary cluster 200A in accordancewith the teachings of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a block diagramillustrating a third exemplary cluster 200B in accordance with theteachings of the present invention. Additional cluster 200 embodimentsare illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20 as clusters 200C, 200D. In cluster200, a full interconnect 275 (as a single or unitary circuit component)is utilized to provide complete interconnections between inputs andoutputs of each of the composite circuit elements 260 and other clustercomponents as illustrated. For example, the full interconnect 275 may beimplemented as a crossbar switch or as dedicated wires. In cluster 200A,a distributed full interconnect 295 (as a distributed plurality ofcircuit components) is utilized to provide complete interconnectionsbetween inputs and outputs of each of the composite circuit elements260, cluster queues 245, and other cluster components as illustrated.For example, the distributed full interconnect 295 may be implemented asa plurality of multiplexers and/or demultiplexers, such as themultiplexer 335 illustrated in FIG. 8 for a selected composite circuitelement 260, along with various wires or bus structures.

Other variations are also illustrated, such as memory 255, 475connections, use of a message manager 265 as a first communicationelement 250, use of a SPE 292 or SME 290, and so on. All such variationsare within the scope of the disclosure. As a consequence, any referenceto any cluster 200-200D embodiment will be understood to mean andinclude any other cluster 200-200D embodiments and vice-versa.

As illustrated in FIGS. 5 and 6, the exemplary cluster 200 (200A)comprises a plurality of composite circuit elements 260 (or compositeelements 260); a plurality of communication elements, namely, one ormore first communication elements 250 and a full interconnect 275 or adistributed full interconnect 295 (also referred to as a fullcommunication element or full interconnect bus (“FIBus”)); a statemachine element (SME) 290 or SPE 292; a message manager 265; and variouscommunication structures, such as busses or other types of communicationmedia. It should be noted that a SPE 292 (or SME 290) and messagemanager 265 may not required in every cluster 200 or zone 201 for someexemplary embodiments; in various embodiments, depending upon theapplication to be run, selected clusters 200 may comprise predominantlycomposite circuit elements 260 (e.g., having digital signal processing(“DSP”) functions), with processing and/or message managementfunctionality provided by SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) and message managers265 of other clusters 200 (with corresponding communication via thefirst communication elements 250). In other exemplary embodiments,rather than or in addition to including one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs290) within the clusters 200, the corresponding functions may instead beimplemented through the use of one or more external controllers 175 orother, off-chip controllers, state machines, or processors. In selectedembodiments, the full interconnect 275 may be implemented as a crossbarswitch or pass-transistors (with or without arbitration capability),while the distributed full interconnect 295 may be implemented as aplurality of switches, pass transistors, multiplexers and/ordemultiplexers, for example.

In other exemplary embodiments, the full interconnect 275, 295 isimplemented as a plurality of dedicated wires or busses connecting everyoutput of composite circuit elements 260, 260A and cluster queues 245 toevery input of composite circuit elements 260, 260A and cluster queues245 within a zone 201, and depending upon the zone 201 or embodiment,also providing full connection capability to a SPE 292 and a messagemanager 265. Additional, context-based switching is provided by inputand output multiplexers 335, 335A, 380, 380A. In another exemplaryembodiment, two (or more) full interconnects 275, 295 are implementedwithin a zone 201, each providing full coupling among a subset of thecomponents within a zone 201, such as a first full interconnect 275, 295coupling composite circuit elements 260, 260A and even numbered clusterqueues 245 for performing computations on “real” numbers (inmathematical terms”) and an independent, second full interconnect 275,295 coupling composite circuit elements 260, 260A and odd numberedcluster queues 245 for performing computations on “imaginary” numbers(in mathematical terms”). For the latter case, a zone 201 may simply beviewed containing fewer components, with the “real number” groupingbeing a first zone 201 and the “imaginary number” grouping being asecond zone 201, as in both cases, each has a plurality of compositecircuit elements 260, 260A and at least one cluster queue 245 coupled toa full interconnect 275, 295, which couples all outputs to all inputswithin that smaller zone.

Also in selected embodiments, as various options or variations, anexemplary cluster 200 may also include additional memory, such as secondmemory element 255, which may be a type of queue, such as a long queue,for example; may also include an cluster queue 245, such as a FIFO,buffer or other memory structure, for transfer of data, control and/orconfiguration information between adjacent clusters 200 withoututilizing the various first communication elements 250 and secondcommunication elements 210 (creating the “fast path” connections 215illustrated in FIG. 2); and may also include a separate or additionalcommunication structure for communication between the SPE 292 (or SME290) and other components within the cluster 200, illustrated asconfiguration/control bus 285. In other exemplary embodiments, memory isimplemented as cluster RAM 475.

Not separately illustrated in FIGS. 5 and 6, each element interface andcontrol 280 also includes a memory, input queues, and an elementcontroller (comprised of a plurality of conditional logic structures(gates)), discussed in greater detail with reference to FIGS. 8 and 25.In addition, first communication elements 250 may also include a memorystructure, to transfer incoming data to a selected composite circuitelement 260, and to address and route outgoing data from a selectedcomposite circuit element 260. While FIGS. 5 and 6 illustrate a cluster200 (200A) comprising six composite circuit elements 260, two firstcommunication elements 250, one state machine element (“SME”) 290, onemessage manager 265, and one full interconnect 275 or distributed fullinterconnect 295, with possible additional memory such as second memoryelement 255 and one or more various communication structures such ascluster queue 245, it will be understood by those of skill in theelectronic arts that any amounts and combinations of these componentsmay be utilized, and that any and all such amounts and combinations areconsidered equivalent and within the scope of the invention.

Each composite circuit element 260 is comprised of a computationalcircuit element 270 and a uniform (constant or fixed) element interfaceand control 280. While generally referred to as a “computational”circuit element 270, it is to be understood that a circuit element 270may perform functions other than computations, such as bit reordering,memory functions, control functions, state machine functions,communication functions, instruction processing, and all suchnon-computational or other functionality is considered within the scopeof a circuit element 270 of the invention regardless of nomenclature.

Within a cluster 200, the composite circuit elements 260 have(computational) elements 270, which may be of the same or differenttype, and may be included within the cluster 200 in any selectedcombination or mix, and may be static (nonconfigurable) or configurable.As illustrated in FIG. 5, the elements 270 are a configurable element(type “A”) 270 _(A), two configurable elements (type “B”) 270 _(B), aconfigurable element (type “D”) 270 _(D), a configurable element (type“E”) 270 _(E), and a configurable or non-configurable first memorycircuit element 270 _(M). A communication circuit element 270 _(C) isutilized in the first communication elements 250, which is typicallynon-configurable but which could be implemented to be configurable. Inaddition, any selected elements 270 may also be implemented to benonconfigurable, and all such variations are within the scope of theinvention. The configurable computational elements 270 generally performcomputation and/or bit manipulation and may be, for example,configurable arithmetic logic units (ALUs), configurable triple ALUs,configurable multiply and accumulate (MAC) units, configurable bitreordering elements (BREOs), configurable multipliers, configurableGalois multipliers, configurable barrel shifters, configurable look-uptables, configurable and programmable controllers, super or large ALUs(capable of a wide variety of arithmetic calculations, functions,comparisons and manipulations), and so on. The configurablecomputational elements 270 generally are comprised of combinatoriallogic gates, but may also include conditional logic structures, asnecessary or desirable, such as to evaluate the existence of a conditionor event. Exemplary configurable elements 270 are illustrated in FIGS. 9and 10.

As mentioned above, in some exemplary embodiments, elements 270 may alsobe implemented to provide communication functions, may be configurableor non-configurable, and may provide interfaces for internalcommunication, external communication, and memory access. In anexemplary embodiment, such external communication functions are providedthrough the message manager 265, which provides a selected communicationfunction of a plurality of communication functions, which typicallydiffer between and among the various clusters. The plurality ofcommunication functions may include, for example, providing an Ethernetinterface, a PCI interface, a PCI Express interface, a USB or USB2interface, a DDR SDRAM interface or other type of memory interface, awireless interface, an interface to another IC, etc. Typically, themessage manager 265 of a given cluster 200 provides one type ofcommunication function, with the message managers 265 of other clusters200 correspondingly providing other types of communication functions.For example, the message manager 265 of a first cluster 200 may providea PCI Express interface, while the message manager 265 of a secondcluster 200 may provide a DDR-2 interface, while the message manager 265of a third cluster 200 may provide an Ethernet interface.

In addition, the message manager 265 may also have a direct connectionto the interconnect 155, or more particularly, the second communicationchannel or bus 220, for intercluster communication independently of thevarious first communication elements 250, such as for communication ofconfiguration and/or control information between or among the SPEs 292(or SMEs 290) and other components. For example, during run-timebinding, the various configurations and data routings may be transmittedto the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) as messages via the message manager 265.As a consequence, the message manager 265 is illustrated as directlycoupled to or part of the SPE 292 (or SME 290) (e.g., withoutintervening or separate bus or communication structures). Such exemplaryembodiments are discussed in greater detail below with reference toFIGS. 18-38.

The first memory circuit element 270 _(M), second memory element 255and/or memory within the element interface and control 280 may be anyform of memory, machine-readable storage or memory media, whethervolatile or non-volatile, including without limitation, RAM, FLASH,DRAM, SDRAM, SRAM, MRAM, FeRAM, ROM, EPROM or E²PROM, or any other typeof memory, storage medium, or data storage apparatus or circuit, whichis known or which becomes known, or combinations thereof. In a firstexemplary embodiment, the first memory element 270 _(M) and the memorywithin the element interface and control 280 are implemented as contentaddressable memories (“CAMs”). In a second exemplary embodiment, thefirst memory element 270 _(M) and the memory within the elementinterface and control 280 are implemented as SDRAM.

The first communication elements 250 are similar to the compositecircuit elements 260, including an element interface and control 280,and a circuit element 270 which, in this case, is a communicationelement 270 _(C), which may be configurable or non-configurable,depending upon the selected embodiment. For example, configuration mayoccur to determine switching or routing paths within the communicationelement 270 _(C). The communication element 270 _(C) provides formessage or packet switched data transmission and reception to and fromthe interconnect 155, and circuit-switched communication within thecluster 200.

Similarly, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) in various exemplary embodimentsalso comprises an element interface and control 280, with its“computational” element (270) being the more specific case of aprocessor or state machine element, which also may be configurable ornon-configurable, depending upon the selected embodiment. The variousmemories 330 and input and output queues 320, 315, for SPE 292 (or SME290) embodiment, alternatively may be provided as internal registers.Using the element interface and control 280, as discussed below, alsoprovides for the SPE 292 (or SME 290) to have a plurality of contexts,such as for multithreading. In addition, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) isillustrated as having direct access to the element interface and control280 of the composite circuit elements 260 (via configuration/control bus285) for ease of directly populating configurations, control, andreceiving interrupts, and a direct connection to the first memoryelement 270 _(M) (and/or second memory element 255) (e.g., through oneport of a dual port RAM), to facilitate corresponding memory accessesfor instruction/code processing and other data access. As mentionedabove, the SPE 292 (or SME 290), in conjunction with any of theavailable memories (e.g., a composite memory element 260 _(M) or secondmemory element 255), constitutes a “controller” within the scope of thepresent invention, such as a cluster controller, a superclustercontroller, a matrix controller, etc. Such a controller may also includethe message manager 265 or similar functionality.

By utilizing the same (or similar) element interface and control 280,the first communication elements 250 and SPE 292 (or SME 290) appear tothe composite circuit elements 260 within the cluster 200 as simplyanother composite circuit element 260, with corresponding advantagesdiscussed below. For example, the other composite circuit elements 260then do not need to have any knowledge that their output is provided toor input is being received from a first communication element 250 or aSPE 292 (or SME 290), and do not need to accommodate any different typeof data reception or transmission. Other configurations of a messagemanager 265 are illustrated and discussed with reference to FIG. 38.

In exemplary embodiments, the composite circuit elements 260 may includesome form of identification by type or kind of composite circuit element260 (i.e., type of circuit element 270 within the composite circuitelement 260), to facilitate identification by a state machine element(“SME”) 290 (or a controller 175). Such identification may be retainedin an available memory within the cluster 200 in a wide variety offorms, such as hard-wired as a ROM within a composite circuit element260 during fabrication, loaded into a memory during a boot process, andso on. Such type identification, for example, may be maintained in amemory composite element 260, memory 255, 475, or within the memory 330of the element interface and control 280 discussed below.

The element interface and control 280 provides both (1) a uniforminterface for input to and output from each configurable circuit element270, memory element, communication element, or SPE 292 (or SME 290); and(2) a uniform control structure, and is discussed in greater detailbelow with reference to FIGS. 8, 16, 25 and 26. Because each elementinterface and control 280 has the same structure for every compositecircuit element 260, first communication element 250, and SPE 292 (orSME 290) within every cluster 200, every such element 260, 250, 290, 292may be controlled in a uniform, repeatable manner, without regard to thetype of element, such as whether the element (270) is a configurableALU, a configurable barrel shifter, a communication element, or a statemachine element. In addition, every such composite circuit element 260,first communication element 250, and SPE 292 (or SME 290) maycommunicate with any other composite circuit element 260, firstcommunication element 250, and SPE 292 (or SME 290) in a uniform,repeatable manner, without regard to the type of element (e.g., aconfigurable circuit element 270). More particularly, every compositecircuit element 260, first communication element 250, and SPE 292 (orSME 290) may be addressed in a uniform manner, through the addressingscheme discussed above.

As a first result of such uniformity, no composite circuit element 260,first communication element 250, and SPE 292 (or SME 290) is required toknow anything about any other composite circuit element 260, firstcommunication element 250, and SPE 292 (or SME 290) from which itreceives input or to which it provides output, i.e., each compositecircuit element 260, 260A and first communication element 250 may begenerally ignorant about its surroundings and functions. (Depending uponthe implementation, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) may have additionalfunctionality for monitoring, testing and controlling other elements, sothat it is knowledgeable about its surroundings and functions). As asecond result of such uniformity, each composite circuit element 260,first communication element 250, and SPE 292 (or SME 290) may beconfigured, addressed and queried in a uniform manner, also withoutregard to the type of element (e.g., type of circuit element 270).

As a third and very significant result, each composite circuit element260, 260A having a selected type of circuit element)s) 270 is virtuallycompletely interchangeable with any other composite circuit element 260,260A having the same selected type(s) of circuit element(s) 270, exceptto the extent of any locality (distance) constraints for the performanceof a particular computation or algorithm. As a consequence, subject tosuch constraints, for execution of a given algorithm, the operationsperformed by any selected composite circuit element 260, 260A having aselected type of circuit element(s) 270 may be freely assigned ortransferred to another composite circuit element 260, 260A having thesame selected type of circuit element(s) 270, without any detrimentaleffect. In the event of a failure or defect in a particular compositecircuit element 260, 260A having a selected type of circuit element(s)270, its operations may be transferred to: (1) another availablecomposite circuit element 260 having the same selected type of circuitelement(s) 270; (2) a group of available composite circuit elements 260,260A which together are capable of performing the same operations; or(3) an otherwise unavailable composite circuit element 260, 260A havingthe same selected type of circuit element 270 (or group of compositecircuit elements 260) which had been performing another or a lowerpriority operation. For example, in the event of a failure of acomposite circuit element 260, 260A having a triple ALU configurableelement 270, its operations may be transferred to three compositecircuit elements 260, 260A which each have a single ALU configurableelement 270, which may then be configured to perform the operations ofthe triple ALU. Similarly, the functions performed by a firstcommunication element 250 or a SPE 292 (or SME 290) may also betransferred to other available first communication elements 250 and SPEs292 (or SMEs 290), as needed.

Within a zone 201, the full interconnect 275 and/or distributed fullinterconnect 295, which may be implemented as a plurality of dedicatedbus connections, a full crossbar switch or as another arrangement ofswitches, multiplexers, demultiplexers, or other transistorarrangements, provides for any output of any composite circuit element260, 260A, cluster queue 245 (and first communication element 250 andSPE 292 (or SME 290) in some embodiments) to be coupled to any input ofany (other) composite circuit element 260, 260A, cluster queue 245 (andfirst communication element 250 and SPE 292 (or SME 290) in someembodiments), and/or to be coupled to any other component within itscluster 200 or, via cluster queue 245, to the full interconnect 275and/or distributed full interconnect 295 of an adjacent or diagonallyadjacent cluster 200 (for input to any composite circuit element 260,260A, cluster queue 245, first communication element 250, and SPE 292(or SME 290) or other component of the adjacent cluster 200). (Feedbackof output to input within the same composite circuit element may, inselected embodiments, be accomplished internally within the compositecircuit element 260, 260A, such as through a multiplexer or otherswitching arrangement, not separately illustrated in FIG. 8.) In anexemplary embodiment, any output of a composite circuit element 260,260A, cluster queue 245, first communication element 250, and SPE 292(or SME 290) may be provided as an input to any other composite circuitelement 260, 260A, cluster queue 245, first communication element 250,and 260, 260A, in parallel and concurrently, through full interconnect275 and/or distributed full interconnect 295, allowing complete andconcurrent communication between and among all composite circuitelements 260, 260A, cluster queues 245, first communication elements250, and SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) within a zone 201 (with the exception ofpotential conflicts requiring arbitration or other resolution).

Depending upon the selected embodiment, the outputs from a compositecircuit element 260, 260A may be directed or switched in a plurality ofways, all of which are within the scope of the present invention. Forexample, an optional output switching element 380 (illustrated in FIG.8) may be provided for every composite circuit element 260, which mayswitch the outputs for internal feedback within the composite circuitelement 260, switch the outputs to the full interconnect 275 ordistributed full interconnect 295, switch the outputs directly to afirst communication element 250, or switch the outputs directly to theSPE 292 (or SME 290). In the selected embodiment discussed below withreference to FIG. 8, internal feedback may be provided from any stagewithin a computational element 270, and the computational element 270outputs are provided to an output memory (or output queue or register)315 and then directly to the full interconnect 275, for switching toother composite circuit elements 260, to the SPE 292 (or SME 290), or tothe first communication elements 250. Similarly, inputs to a compositecircuit element 260 may be provided in a plurality of ways, such as fromthe full interconnect 275 or distributed full interconnect 295, ordirectly from the full interconnect 275 and other sources, such as fromsecond memory element 255, the SPE 292 (or SME 290), and/or firstcommunication elements 250. Other connectivity is described in greaterdetail with reference to FIGS. 18-38.

This communication functionality may be implemented based upon either orboth data sources and/or data destinations. For destination-basedcommunication, destination addresses for each context are typicallystored in a routing table of an output queue 315 (FIG. 8). Output isthen provided for the corresponding address, with the full interconnect275 or distributed full interconnect 295 configured for thecorresponding destination address. For this embodiment, when one outputfrom a composite circuit element 260, 260A is to be applied as input tomore than one composite circuit element 260, 260A, these additionalinputs may be provided sequentially. In other exemplary embodiments,additional output fan-out may be provided, such that an output of onecomposite circuit element 260, 260A may be input concurrently into aplurality of other composite circuit elements 260, 260A, also via fullinterconnect 275, distributed full interconnect 295 or othercommunication structures. Handshaking protocols may also be utilized,with the destination sending or not sending an acknowledgement uponreceipt of data.

For source-based communication, implemented in an exemplary embodiment,source addresses for each context are typically stored in configurationand control registers 330, 330A utilized by input controllers 336 and/orinput queues 320. Every source provides its output on a selected bus orcommunication lines of the full interconnect 275 or distributed fullinterconnect 295. For incoming data, the corresponding input queue 320determines whether the data is from a source designated for one or moreof its contexts and, if so, when memory space is available, receives thecorresponding data. This source-based communication provides ease ofmulticasting or broadcasting, as any and all destinations are enabled toconcurrently receive any data of interest transmitted on the selecteddata lines. Handshaking protocols may also be utilized, with thedestination sending or not sending a denial or other unavailabilitymessage when it is unable to receive the data transmitted (therebyproviding for the source to resend the data at another time). Thissource-based protocol is discussed in greater detail below.

In another exemplary embodiment, no handshaking or other type ofcommunication acknowledgement is utilized. Physical data links may beestablished at run time, as part of the binding process, with allcorresponding computational processes allowed to execute, without a needto determine input data availability or space availability for outputdata. Such an implementation is useful for pipelining, such as for innerkernels of various algorithms. In addition, such an implementation isuseful to avoid data stalls or data back pressure, when one data processmay be waiting for incoming data and thereby affecting data throughputof other processes. In addition, combinations of these implementationsmay also be utilized, such as various components utilizing dataflow-based operations, and other components not utilizing dataflow-based operations. For example, data flow-based operations may beutilized for operations within a cluster 200, with other operations,such as communication operations, allowed to simply execute (e.g., routeand switch).

Continuing to refer to FIGS. 5 and 6, the full interconnect 275 anddistributed full interconnect 295 are illustrated generally, for easeand clarity of illustration, to represent generally the types ofcommunication within a cluster 200, such as, for example: to provide forthe input and output of any composite circuit element 260 to be coupledto other composite circuit elements 260, 260A, to the SPE 292 (or SME290), to the message manager 265, or to either (or both) firstcommunication elements 250 or cluster queue 245, for data transfer to orfrom other clusters 200; communication between the SPE 292 (or SME 290)and any composite circuit element 260, 260A (including memory elementsand communication elements); communication between the SPE 292 (or SME290) and either or both first communication elements 250, for transferof control information, queries, query responses, and so on;communication between the message manager 265 and interconnect 155; andcommunication between the first communication elements 250 and thevarious memories within the cluster 200 (e.g., second memory element 255and the other memories within the various components of the cluster200); and any other communication between or among combinations ofcomponents within a cluster 200. It will be understood by those of skillin the art that a wide variety of communication structures andcommunication media are available, and all such variations areconsidered equivalent and within the scope of the present invention.

The SPE 292 (or SME 290) functions as a (comparatively small)microprocessor (or microcontroller), such as a RISC processor, forexecution of instructions, determination of conditions and events,operating system management, and control of the composite circuitelements 260, 260A. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) can be utilized toimplement legacy C programs and implement state for otherwise statelessdataflow operations of the composite circuit elements 260, 260A. The SPE292 (or SME 290) is adapted to function as a sequential processor, andits operations are augmented by the composite circuit elements 260, 260Awithin the same cluster 200. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) also may haveinternal memory, may utilize the second memory element 255, cluster RAM475, a memory composite circuit element 260 _(M), or a memory 330 withina composite circuit element 260, for storage of data and instructions(or actions). For example, the second memory element 255 may beimplemented as a plurality of “long” queues, having sufficient depth tostore instructions which may be utilized by the SPE 292 (or SME 290).The SPE 292 (or SME 290) may utilize any of the composite circuitelements 260, 260A to perform calculations or other functions which willbe needed in its execution of its program, such as to add or to comparetwo numbers, for example. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) performs controlfunctions of computations, such as determinations of conditionals,represented in programming languages using statements such as IF, CASE,WHILE, FOR, etc. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) may also have controlregisters or other types of internal memory, such as to define and keeptrack of its control functions. As previously mentioned, not everycluster 200 is required to have a SPE 292 (or SME 290).

In addition, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) is illustrated as having, inaddition to direct access to the element interface and control 280 ofthe composite circuit elements 260 (via configuration/control bus 285),a direct connection to the first memory element 270 _(M) (and/or secondmemory element 255), to facilitate corresponding memory accesses forinstruction/code processing and other data access, and generally to themessage manager 265 as well. Alternatively to the use of theconfiguration/control bus 285, such communication may be provided viathe full interconnect 275 or distributed full interconnect 295, forexample.

The SPE 292 (or SME 290) may be utilized to implement a hardwareoperating system, and in a supervisory mode, has access to all of theresources within its cluster 200, thereby able to program, control, andmonitor all of the composite circuit elements 260, 260A within thecluster 200. For implementations in which one or more clusters 200 donot have a SPE 292 (or SME 290) included within the cluster 200, one ormore other SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) of other clusters 200 will performthese functions and operations. In addition to task control, the SPE 292(or SME 290) is utilized in self-testing of cluster resources, loadingor assigning tasks (actions (or instructions)), binding actions (orinstructions) (e.g., run-time binding) to the composite circuit elements260, 260A, and in creating the connections between and among the variouscomposite circuit elements 260, 260A and clusters 200. The assigning andbinding process is discussed in greater detail with reference to FIG.14. Collectively, the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) within the clusters 200function as a highly distributed controller, running the operatingsystem of the apparatus 100 (in conjunction with any needed compositecircuit elements 260, 260A), either with or without other controllers175. In exemplary embodiments, various SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) may takeon additional functions, such performing a system boot process,operating as a master controller, and determining and mapping functionaland nonfunctional composite circuit elements 260 and other components,for example. The operation of the SPE 292 (or SME 290) is also explainedin greater detail below with reference to FIGS. 8-14.

For example, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) may start a bound task of thecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A within the cluster 200, suspend atask, suspend an action or function of a composite circuit element 260,260A (as part of an overall task), halt a task and free its resources(such as to load and run a higher priority task), set a task to performin a single-step mode, and move a task to another location (such as toperform self-testing of the composite circuit elements 260, 260Acurrently performing the task).

The message manager 265, in the first cluster 200 and second cluster200A embodiments, is utilized for communication external to theapparatus 100, such as for an Ethernet interface, a memory interface(e.g., DDR-2 SDRAM), a PCI-Express interface, etc. The message manager265 is coupled directly to the SPE 292 (or SME 290), and more generally,also may be coupled to the full interconnect 275 or distributed fullinterconnect 295, the first communication elements 250, and/or thecomposite circuit elements 260 (not separately illustrated). Forexample, data words provided by the full interconnect 275 may be outputby the message manager 265 for storage in an external memory. Similarly,also for example, incoming data, configuration or control may betransferred to the SPE 292 (or SME 290) (or stored in second memoryelement 255), such as to provide instructions for the SPE 292 (or SME290), or transferred to a composite circuit element 260, for use andconsumption in computations. In addition, in an exemplary embodiment,the message manager 265 is also coupled to the second communicationchannel or bus 220 (of the interconnect 155).

In an exemplary embodiment, as an additional alternative, the messagemanager 265 is also utilized for communication within the apparatus 100.In this embodiment, the message manager 265 is also utilized for cluster200 to cluster 200 communication, and for SPE 292 (or SME 290) to SPE292 (or SME 290) communication. For example, the message manager 265 isutilized for one composite circuit element 260 of a first cluster 200 totransfer information to another composite circuit element 260 of asecond cluster 200. Additional functions of a message manager 265 arediscussed in greater detail below for various exemplary embodiments.

Also, in an exemplary embodiment, not all message managers 265 in amatrix 150 are implemented to provide external communication. Forexample, in one alternative embodiment utilizing four matrices 150, eachmatrix 150 is provided with a total of six PCI-express interfacesimplemented through the message managers 265 of six correspondingclusters 200 (one per supercluster 185, in an embodiment in whichsuperclusters 185 are implemented identically). Similarly, in this fourmatrix example, each matrix 150 is provided with a total of one or twoDDR-2 interfaces implemented through the message managers 265 of one ortwo corresponding clusters 200. As a result, there are remainingclusters 200 which have corresponding message managers 265 which are notproviding interfaces and control for external communication. For theseremaining clusters 200, their corresponding message managers 265transfer data to these other clusters 200 having DDR-2 or PCI-expressinterfaces for storage in memory or external communication on aPCI-express bus, respectively, either through second communicationelements 210 (supercluster-level) or third communication elements 190(matrix-level).

The message manager 265 may be implemented in a wide variety of ways,depending upon the selected embodiment. In a first selected embodiment,the message manager 265 is implemented as a finite state machine andimplements communication standards, such as those mentioned above. Whenimplemented as a state machine, the message manager 265 may beimplemented separately or combined as a part of the SPE 292 (or SME290). In a second selected embodiment, the message manager 265 isimplemented as dedicated computational logic gates, also for theprovision of a communication interface, with the SPE 292 (or SME 290)utilized to perform any conditional logic or other state machinefunctions. An exemplary embodiment of a message manager 265 isillustrated in FIG. 38 and discussed in greater detail below.

In exemplary embodiments, as indicated above, the composite circuitelements 260, 260A will include some form of identification by type orkind of composite circuit element 260, 260A (i.e., type of circuitelement 270 within the composite circuit element 260, 260A), tofacilitate identification by a state machine element (“SME”) 290.Generally, a SPE 292 (or SME 290) will determine (and report to otherSMEs 290, as necessary) the types and context availability of thecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A within its cluster 200, for use inrun-time binding. For example, for the illustrated cluster 200, the SPE292 (or SME 290) may determine that the cluster has one configurablebarrel shifter-type element (corresponding to type “A”) 270 _(A), twoconfigurable triple-ALU-type elements (corresponding to type “B”) 270_(B), one configurable Galois multiplier-type element (corresponding totype “C”) 270 _(C), one configurable bit reordering (“BREO”)-typeelement (corresponding to type “D”) 270 _(D), and one contentaddressable memory element (corresponding to type “M”) 270 _(M). The SPE292 (or SME 290) may also determine and report at another time that theBREO-type element of its cluster 200 is no longer functioning properly,so that the operations of its BREO-type element may be transferred to aBREO-type element of another cluster 200.

Continuing to refer to FIGS. 5 and 6, the second memory element 255 (orcluster RAM 475) may receive input and provide output (be written to andread from) either directly or indirectly via the full interconnect 275or distributed full interconnect 295, from a plurality of sources, suchas: (1) to and from the first communication elements 250 (for input fromother clusters 200, such as input of data, instructions or other controlinformation for use by the SPE 292 (or SME 290) or for queuing data foruse by composite circuit elements 260); (2) to and from one or morecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A (including memory composite circuitelement 260 _(M)) within the same cluster 200; (3) to and from the SPE292 (or SME 290); or (4) to and from the message manager 265.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a third exemplary cluster 200Bembodiment in accordance with the teachings of the present invention, asanother variation of a cluster 200. In this embodiment, the cluster 200Bcontains composite circuit elements 260 having communicationfunctionality, such as to provide external communication functionality,e.g., for the communication functionality concentrated within a selectedmatrix 150 as illustrated in FIG. 3. Also in this embodiment, as anoption, the message manager 265 is not utilized for such externalcommunication, which instead is provided within dedicated communicationcomposite circuit elements 260, which may be configurable ornonconfigurable. In this embodiment, each communication compositeelement 260 is utilized to provide a standard I/O interface for(external) communication to and from the apparatus 100, such as DDR-2 orPCI-e interfaces. In addition, the communication composite elements 260may have additional input and output bus or media structures to providesuch interfaces, and are not confined to communicating outside thecluster 200 through the first communication elements 250. Depending uponthe selected embodiment, additional communication composite elements 260may be utilized for increased resiliency and immunity from catastrophicfailure. In all other respects, the clusters 200, 200B are identical,and further differ from cluster 200A in use of a full interconnect 275rather than a distributed full interconnect 295. As a consequence, anyreference to a cluster 200 will be understood to mean and include thethird embodiment illustrated as cluster 200B, as a variation or morespecific case of a cluster 200, and cluster 200B otherwise also will notbe further discussed as a separate embodiment. It should be noted,however, that the first cluster 200 embodiment may also be utilized forthe communication functionality concentrated within a selected matrix150 as illustrated in FIG. 3.

For the cluster embodiments, because of the same matrix, supercluster,cluster and zone addressing, and because of the same element interfaceand control 280, any other cluster 200 (or composite circuit element260, 260A) may communicate with the communication composite elements 260and its cluster 200, or communicate with a cluster 200 having a messagemanager 265 with an external communication interface, in same manner asany communication with any other composite circuit element 260, 260A orcluster 200. As a result, when a cluster 200 or composite circuitelement 260, 260A has a communication external to the apparatus 100, allthat is required is for that cluster 200 or composite circuit element260 to have the address of the corresponding communication compositeelements 260 (with the interface corresponding to the selected form ofcommunication) and/or its cluster 200, or the address of a cluster 200having a message manager 265 with the interface corresponding to theselected form of communication. Such addressing may be provided byvarious components within the cluster 200, such as the message manager265, the SPE 292 (or SME 290), or the first communication elements 250,for example. Such external communication is thereby provided throughvirtual addressing, e.g., via a message manager 265 or cluster 200, orvia a communication composite elements 260 or cluster 200, and thecomposite element 260 does not need any further information concerningthe location or type of the external interface. For example, a cluster200 or composite circuit element 260, 260A does not need any informationconcerning whether its external communication is with a DDR SDRAM or isvia an Ethernet protocol, or where these interfaces may be located onthe apparatus 100. Similarly, for internal communication, a compositecircuit element 260, 260A also does not need any information concerningwhether its communication is within another composite circuit element260 within the same cluster 200 or a different cluster 200.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a fourth exemplary circuitcluster 200C in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.The fourth exemplary circuit cluster 200C differs from the clusterembodiments discussed previously in that its topology has a degree ofinternal hierarchy, with the fourth exemplary circuit cluster 200Cdivided into a plurality of zones 201, illustrated as zones 201A, 201B,201C and 201D, with each zone 201 having four composite circuit elements260 (as illustrated) which are coupled to a separate interconnect 275,295 (which may be full or distributed), and with communication betweeneach zone 201 occurring through a plurality of cluster queues 245. Thecluster queues 245 are utilized for communication within a cluster 200C,and not merely for “fast track” communication between clusters 200. Thefull or distributed interconnect 275, 295 is also source-based, asdescribed in greater detail below, with each destination compositecircuit element 260 monitoring the interconnect 275, 295 forcommunication(s) from its corresponding data source. As an equivalentalternative, the full or distributed interconnect 275, 295 may bedestination-based, as described herein.

The circuit cluster 200C does not include first communication elements250. Instead, communication with other clusters 200, superclusters 185,matrices 150, or external communication (such as to a PCI-e bus) (viasecond channel (or bus structure) 220) is accomplished through themessage manager 265, which provides the additional message-basedcommunication functionality of the first communication elements 250.Each of the composite circuit elements 260, illustrated as CE₀ throughCE₁₄, are coupled to the full or distributed interconnect 275, 295 asdescribed previously, with 4 inputs and 2 outputs to and from eachcomposite circuit elements 260. The cluster queues 245 ₁₂ throughcluster queues 245 ₁₆, as illustrated, provide communication between andamong the various zones 201 of composite circuit elements 260 within thecircuit cluster 200C.

Typically, the cluster queues 245 are implemented as multipleunidirectional ports, using any type of memory as discussed herein, andare implemented to provide several communication paths in bothdirections between zones 201 (one “hop” to any destination zone 201within a cluster 200C, with one “hop” occurring per cycle, absentcontention from other data sources) or between circuit clusters 200C(one or two cycles or “hops” to an adjacent cluster 200C, and one ormore cycles or “hops” to any other destination). In an exemplaryembodiment, each cluster queue 245 provides four communication paths,two in each direction. For example, cluster queue 245 ₁₅ provides twocommunication paths from zone 201B (as a data source) to zone 201D (as adata destination), and provides two communication paths from zone 201D(as a data source) to zone 201B (as a data destination). In an exemplaryembodiment, each cluster queue 245 also has eight contexts, providingeight virtual connections across each cluster queue 245 in eachdirection and for each communication path.

Accordingly, for this embodiment, cluster queues 245 and message managercircuit 265 are also considered “communication elements” within thescope of the disclosure.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary third apparatusembodiment, comprising a supercluster 185C, in accordance with theteachings of the present invention. Using this topology for a circuitcluster 200C, the circuit clusters 200C may be effectively tiled orarrayed with each other, to form a supercluster 185, illustrated assupercluster 185C, having sixteen circuit clusters 200C, illustrated asC0 through C15. Each of the circuit clusters 200C communicates withadjacent circuit clusters 200C through the plurality of cluster queues245. Such superclusters 185C then do not utilize one or more secondcommunication elements 210, and instead connect to one or more thirdcommunication elements 190 through one or more message managers 265within the supercluster 185C.

Referring again to FIG. 18, for this embodiment, the cluster queues 245also provide intercluster communication with adjacent clusters 200C. Asillustrated, the peripheral cluster queues 245 provide communicationbetween the circuit cluster 200C and its adjacent circuit clusters 200C.For intercluster communication, the cluster queues 245 may beimplemented to provide one or two communication paths in each direction,depending on the selected embodiment. For example, in an exemplaryembodiment, the peripheral cluster queues 245 provide one communicationpath in each direction. Using typical geographic coordinates, forexample, cluster queue(s) 245 ₀ provides communication between circuitcluster 200C and an adjacent “northwest” circuit cluster 200C, clusterqueue(s) 245 ₁ and 245 ₂ provide communication between circuit cluster200C and an adjacent “north” circuit cluster 200C, cluster queue(s) 245₃ and 245 ₄ provide communication between circuit cluster 200C and anadjacent “west” circuit cluster 200C, and cluster queue(s) 245 ₅provides communication between circuit cluster 200C and an adjacent“southwest” circuit cluster 200C. Similarly, the cluster queue(s) 245 ₁₁(which may be considered part of an adjacent cluster 200C) providecommunication between circuit cluster 200C and an adjacent “northeast”circuit cluster 200C, cluster queue(s) 245 ₁₀ and 245 ₉ (which may beconsidered part of an adjacent cluster 200C) provide communicationbetween circuit cluster 200C and an adjacent “east” circuit cluster200C, cluster queue(s) 245 ₈ (which may be considered part of anadjacent cluster 200C) provides communication between circuit cluster200C and an adjacent “southeast” circuit cluster 200C, and clusterqueue(s) 245 ₆ and 245 ₇ (which may be considered part of an adjacentcluster 200C) provide communication between circuit cluster 200C and anadjacent “south” circuit cluster 200C.

In addition, for data routing assignments, such as in the run-timebinding described below, rather than routing data or other informationthrough a second communication element 210 to or from a supercluster 185and/or through a first communication element 250 to or from a circuitcluster 200, routing may occur through a message manager 265 to or froma supercluster 185 or a circuit cluster 200, and by routing to adesignated composite circuit element 260 within a supercluster 185C or acircuit cluster 200C through any of the various cluster queues 245,using either the source-based or destination-based communication schemesdescribed herein. This use of cluster queues 245 for interclustercommunication has the potential advantage of reduced latency compared touse of the first communication element 250, insofar as multiple wordsare not required for assembly into a message, and instead may becommunicated as they are generated. The supercluster 185C and circuitcluster 200C otherwise function as described herein for any supercluster185 and circuit cluster 200, respectively. Accordingly, any reference toa supercluster 185 or to a circuit cluster 200 shall be understood tocorrespondingly mean and include a supercluster 185C (185D) or circuitcluster 200C (200D), respectively.

Additional cluster 200, supercluster 185 and matrix 150 embodiments arediscussed below with reference to FIGS. 20-22.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarycomposite circuit element 260 within an exemplary cluster 200 inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention. As illustratedin FIG. 8, the composite circuit element 260 comprises an elementinterface and control 280 and a circuit element 270 (also referred to asa computational element 270), which is generally a configurablecomputational element, but which may also be a nonconfigurablecomputational element, a configurable or nonconfigurable communicationelement, a configurable or nonconfigurable finite state machine element,may be a configurable or nonconfigurable memory element, or may be otherforms of circuitry selected for any particular application of anapparatus 100. Another variation of a composite circuit element 260,namely, composite circuit element 260A, is illustrated and discussedbelow with reference to FIG. 25. Accordingly, unless the specificationcontext requires to the contrary (i.e., a specific difference betweenexemplary embodiments is being noted or described), reference to anycomposite circuit element 260 should be understood to mean and includecomposite circuit element 260A and vice-versa.

As an introduction to the operation of a composite circuit element 260,260A (with control described in greater detail with reference to FIG.16), each action or function performed by a composite circuit element260, 260A generally requires that one or more inputs (i.e., data) bepresent before executing, although in some circumstances, execution mayoccur with zero inputs. Similarly, each action requires that one or moreoutputs have room to store a result although in some circumstances,execution may occur with zero outputs being available. Each input andoutput may be marked as significant (necessary) to the function to becalculated, or may be marked as insignificant (unnecessary), meaningthat the input or output is not needed for the given function to beperformed, with that configuration data (configuration designatingsignificant inputs and outputs) stored in the configuration and controlregisters 330, 330A. The action stored in a context may not run untilall of its significant inputs have at least one value in each inputqueue. Similarly, an action may not run until all of its significantoutputs have room to store at least one result. When these conditionsare met, one or more contexts may execute, depending on contention forinternal resources and other conditions (discussed below). The resourcesneeded depend on the element 270 type and the resources needed by eachcontext. The determination of which context can be run is made by theelement controller 325 of a composite circuit element 260, 260A on aclock-by-clock basis. If more than one context is ready to run, theelement controller 325 will determine which one or ones can runsimultaneously and will use one of several, available, schedulingmechanisms, as specified in the element's configurations. As aconsequence, the execution of an action or function by a compositecircuit element 260, 260A is data-driven.

Each context (or configuration) runs for one clock cycle, as a unit timeperiod in an exemplary embodiment. At the beginning of the cycle, theelement controller 325 determines which context will run. The controller325 then selects that context's configuration from the configuration andcontrol registers 330, 330A, which are the configuration and controlstorage components that are local to each element. This configurationdetermines which, if any, input queues 320 need to be read, whichfunction the element will perform during that clock cycle, and which, ifany, output queues 315 need to receive the results from executing thecontext's function. On the next clock cycle, the data that is in theoutput queue 315 (as a source) can be transmitted over the fullinterconnect 275, 295 to one or more input queues 320 or to clusterqueues 245 that connect adjacent regions.

The act of reading data from the input queues 320 into the element 270is independent from the writing of data into the input queue 320 fromthe full interconnect 275, 295. The act of reading and transmitting datafrom an output queue 315 to one or more destinations is independent ofthe writing of data into an output queue 315 by an element's context. Inone embodiment, the multiplicity of contexts that are part of each inputor output queue 320, 315 is built from a common set of circuit elements,only one context of which can be written at a time. With some exceptions(such as for a memory composite circuit element 260M), in exemplaryembodiments, only one context of a given input queue 320 or output queue315 can be read at a time. The read and write contexts on a given inputor output queue 320, 315 need not be the same, so that one context of aqueue can be read at the same time as another or the same context isbeing written in that queue. In the exemplary embodiments, all queuesoperate independently of each other.

Unlike other embodiments of reconfigurable circuitry, the apparatus 100,140 has two forms of reconfiguration. One, like other forms ofprogrammable logic, consists of downloading a program, consisting of aset of configurations for each of the elements in the program to beperformed. This type of reconfiguration happens once, before a programis to be run. The configuration remains active in the programmable logicfor as long as the program is to be run.

The second form of reconfiguration is where each element has multipleconfigurations stored as contexts in the configuration and controlregisters 330, 330A. The elements 270 are time-shared during theoperation of the program, with different contexts executing in differenttime intervals. In this embodiment, such time-sharing depends on thearrival of data in the input queues for each context of every element.While one context of an element is executing, any other context can begathering data in its input queues and broadcasting data from its outputqueues.

In an exemplary embodiment, the element interface and control 280comprises: (1) an element controller 325; (2) a memory 330 (such as acontent addressable memory (“CAM”) or random access memory such asSDRAM) which stores contexts and control information (e.g.,configuration words); (3) input queues 320 (as a form of memory); and(4) output queues (or registers) 315 (also as a form of memory). Inother exemplary embodiments, the element interface and control 280 mayinclude the element controller 325, the memory 330, and either the inputqueues 320 or the output queues 315, but not both. In additionalexemplary embodiments, the element interface and control 280 may includethe memory 330, and either the input queues 320 or the output queues315, but not the element controller 325. In the latter embodiment, oncea SPE 292 (or SME 290) has assigned actions and established the datarouting, no separate or additional control is utilized within thecomposite circuit elements 260, with the composite circuit elements 260allowed to freely and/or continuously execute an assigned context.

As mentioned above, in selected embodiments, the element interface andcontrol 280 may also include an optional output switching element 380such as one or more switches, transistors, multiplexers ordemultiplexers, to provide direct switching capability for output data,such as for internal feedback within the composite circuit element 260,or for providing output data to the SPE 292 (or SME 290), to the messagemanager 265, or to the first communication elements 250, in addition toproviding output data to the full interconnect 275 or distributed fullinterconnect 295. As mentioned above, the memory 330, input queues 320and output queues 315 may be implemented as any form of memory,including without limitation any of the memory types mentionedpreviously, such as CAM or SDRAM.

The input queues 320 provide a plurality of inputs 365 into theconfigurable circuit element 270, illustrated as an exemplary fourinputs each having a width of one 16-bit data word. Alternatively, thewidth may be wider, such as to include a bit designating a placeholder,for example. The input queues 320 may be independent from each other ormay be dependent upon each other, such as using 2 inputs for a combined32-bit data word. In exemplary embodiments, input queues 320 areprovided for each of the inputs into the circuit element 270, with eachof the input queues 320 providing a separate queue for each contextwhich may be utilized by the circuit element 270. In addition, the inputqueues 320 may be implemented as “short queues”, having a depth of 1 or2 data words, although deeper queues and other forms of memory arewithin the scope of the invention. For an exemplary embodiment, eightcontexts are utilized, for each of 4 inputs, with a depth of at least 2data words. Contexts may also be combined, such as to implement a largerqueue, e.g., 16 words, for a selected context.

The input queues 320 may receive data from any of a plurality of inputsources, depending upon the switching arrangements, either directly orvia the full interconnect 275 or distributed full interconnect 295, suchas: (1) from the first communication elements 250 (for input from otherclusters 200); (2) from one or more other composite circuit elements 260(including memory composite element 260 _(M)) within the same cluster200; (3) from the second memory element 255; (4) from the messagemanager 265; or (5) from the SPE 292 (or SME 290) (e.g., when utilizedby the SPE 292 (or SME 290) for calculation of a value or comparison of2 values, such as to evaluate a condition or an event). As illustratedin FIG. 8, the input queues 320 receive data from either a fullinterconnect 275 or a distributed full interconnect 295, illustrated asan exemplary input multiplexer 335. For an exemplary embodiment, theinput multiplexer 335 is a 16-to-1 multiplexer, allowing the inputqueues 320 to obtain data from any assigned source by selecting bussesof the interconnect 275, 295 for input data. An output from a circuitelement 270 also may be fed back to be provided as an input, through theinput queues 320, or directly within the circuitry of the element 270,via an output switching element 380 mentioned above, or simply via thefull interconnect 275.

In an exemplary embodiment, two output queues (registers or other formsof memory) 315 are provided, each having the corresponding eightcontexts, each having a width of one 16-bit data word, and having aselected depth of 1, 2 or more data words. Alternatively, the width maybe wider, such as to include a bit designating a placeholder, forexample. The output queues 315 also may be independent from each otheror may be dependent upon each other, such as using 2 output queues 315for a combined 32-bit data word. The contexts may also be combined, suchas to implement a larger queue, e.g., 8-16 words, for a selectedcontext. In addition to storing output data, the output queues 315(utilizing an incorporated state machine) may also replicate outputdata, such as providing the same output data to additional contexts fordistribution to additional destinations.

A plurality of outputs 375 are provided from the output queues 315 ofthe circuit element 270, illustrated as two outputs, also each having awidth of one 16-bit data word (or wider, as discussed above, such as forinclusion of a placeholder bit, control information, or other data). Theoutputs 375 also may be independent from each other or may be dependentupon each other, such as using 2 outputs for a combined 32-bit dataword. The outputs 375 are provided to the full interconnect 275 ordistributed full interconnect 295 (or the optional output switchingelement 380), which may independently provide each of the plurality ofoutputs 375 to any of the following (via corresponding communicationstructures or bus 350): (1) to the first communication elements 250 (foroutput to other clusters 200); (2) to one or more (other) compositecircuit elements 260 (including memory composite element 260 _(M))within the same cluster 200; (3) to the SPE 292 (or SME 290) (such aswhen utilized by the SPE 292 (or SME 290) for calculation of a value orcomparison of 2 values (e.g., to evaluate a condition or an event)); (4)to the message manager 265; or (5) to an optional second memory element255, such as a long queue for input into the SPE 292 (or SME 290) orother components. As mentioned above, the optional output switchingelement 380 and other output switching arrangements are also availableand will be apparent to those of skill in the electronic arts, areconsidered equivalent and are within the scope of the present invention.

In a selected embodiment, the memory 330 is implemented as a CAM, tofacilitate searching and identification of stored task identifiers (taskIDs) and stored action identifiers (action IDs). In another embodiment,the memory 330 is implemented as RAM, with searching and identificationperformed utilizing other search methods, such as binary searching.Other types and combinations of memory may be utilized, however, and allare considered equivalent and within the scope of the present invention,whether volatile or non-volatile, including without limitation any typeor combination of RAM, FLASH, DRAM, SDRAM, SRAM, MRAM, FeRAM, ROM, EPROMor E²PROM, or any other type of memory, storage medium, or data storageapparatus or circuit, which is known or which becomes known, dependingupon the selected embodiment.

The memory 330 is utilized in the exemplary embodiments to store bothcontexts and control information, utilized to configure the configurableelement 270 and direct its operations. Such contexts and controlinformation is stored as a configuration word in the exemplaryembodiments, as a plurality of information fields, and is discussedbelow with reference to FIG. 16. In addition, through the SPE 292 (orSME 290), such configuration words may be altered, deleted, supplanted,added, and so on, and by modifying various bits within the configurationword, the execution of operations by the circuit element 270 may also becontrolled. This local storage of contexts and control informationprovides for extremely fast execution capability, as configurations orinstructions do not need to be fetched and read from a remote memory,but are instantly available as contexts for immediate configuration andcontrol of the circuit element 270. As such, the apparatus 100 is notsubject to the “von Neumann” bottleneck which limits the executioncapabilities of typical processors. Indeed, the various memories 330function as a large, very highly distributed instruction memory whichmay be utilized advantageously, such as for distributed processing,distributed digital signal processing, distributed programming, anddistributed rebinding of instructions (or actions) in the event of acomponent failure, for example.

This use and local storage of contexts also allows for significant timemultiplexing of operations of composite circuit elements 260, 260A,first communication elements 250, and SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290). Forexample, while one context of a selected composite circuit element 260may require input data which has not yet been created by anothercomposite circuit element 260, another context may be able to beexecuted on the selected composite circuit element 260, rather than thecomposite circuit element 260 remaining idle. Similarly, the use of aplurality of contexts by a SPE 292 (or SME 290) allows multithreadedoperation. For example, a SPE 292 (or SME 290) may commence execution offirst code with a particular first data set for a first context, storeinterim results and a first code pointer, commence execution of secondcode with a second data set for a second context and provide an output,followed by returning to the first context for continued execution ofthe first code using the first code pointer and the stored, interimresults. This use of time multiplexed contexts further allowsinterleaving of tasks and usage of resources which otherwise might beidle, allowing tasks to share resources and increasing the overallresource utilization of the IC.

The element controller 325 may be implemented through combinationallogic gates and/or as a finite state machine, and is utilized to controlhow the circuit element 270 is configured and when the circuit element270 operates, utilizing the configuration word (contexts and controlinformation) stored in memory 330. More specifically, in exemplaryembodiments, the circuit element 270 operates based on data flow, suchthat when it has data at its inputs, when it has an availabledestination to store or consume the output data to be produced, and whenauthorized by the element controller 325, the circuit element 270 willcommence operations (or fire) and perform its calculations ormanipulations on the input data and provide the corresponding outputdata. The element controller 325 controls this data flow operation,based on a plurality of conditions and priorities (and other informationstored as one or more configuration words in memory 330). For example,when more than one context is ready for execution, the elementcontroller 325 may arbitrate which runs first, such as throughround-robin, or evaluation of one or more priorities, a scheduledexecution of an activity, or when the activity last occurred (e.g., amost recently executed action may have a lower priority in thearbitration, while a least recently executed action may have a higherpriority in the arbitration).

The element controller 325 may be implemented with varying levels ofsophistication. As mentioned above, in one embodiment, the elementcontroller 325 is not implemented, with the composite circuit elements260 essentially operating in a continuous mode, subject to otherconstraints (e.g., control from any of the various SMEs 290). At theother extreme, the element controller 325 may provide multi-threadedoperation of the circuit element 270, such as by storing a current stateof a partial execution of a first context in the (first) memory 330,executing a second context (via the circuit element 270), and retrievingthe current state and resuming execution of the first context by thecircuit element 270.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating a fifth exemplary circuitcluster 200D in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.Circuit cluster 200D is quite similar to circuit cluster 200C, having azone 201 architecture with cluster queues 245, but differs in severalrespects. First, each zone 201 (illustrated as zones 201E, 201F, 201G,and 201H) is comprised of a plurality of composite circuit elements260A, each of which has the functionality and instruction set of severalcomputational elements 270 which may be utilized and which share oneelement interface and control 280, rather than a composite circuitelement 260 having just one computational element 270 functionality witha corresponding element interface and control 280. A representativecomposite circuit element 260A is discussed below with reference to FIG.25). Second, within each circuit cluster 200D, there is at least onemessage manager 265 (also which implements the functionality of a firstcommunication element 250), which is implemented in conjunction with amemory composite circuit element 260M (MEMU), discussed in greaterdetail below, forming a composite circuit element 260A₁ referred to as aMemory and Messaging Element (“MME”). The additional composite circuitelements 260A are: an Arithmetic and Control Element (“ACE”), whichcombines the functionality of a multiplier (MULT), a “super” ALU (SALU),a triple ALU (TALU), and a look-up table (“ELUT”), illustrated ascomposite circuit element 260A₂; a Bit Operations and Control Element(“BCE”), which combines the functionality of a multiplier (MULT), atriple ALU (TALU), a bit re-ordering element (BREO) and a look-up table(“ELUT”), illustrated as composite circuit element 260A₃; a Shift andArithmetic Element (“SAE”), which combines the functionality of amultiplier (MULT), a triple ALU (TALU), a barrel shifter (BSHF), and alook-up table (“ELUT”), illustrated as composite circuit element 260A₄;and a Sequential and Memory Element (SPM), which contains thefunctionality of a Sequential Processor (SP) (instead of a SME 290) anda memory composite circuit element 260M (MEMU), illustrated as compositecircuit element 260A₅. It should also be noted that composite circuitelements 260A and zones 201 having other functionalities may also beimplemented and are within the scope of the disclosure.

One of the advantages of the circuit cluster 200C and circuit cluster200D topologies is that they may be tiled (connected on adjacent sides)to form superclusters 185 (185C and 185D), which in turn may be tiled toform matrices 150, as illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 22. Not separatelyillustrated, such tiling may continue to form larger and largercircuits, as may be desired or capable of being fabricated. FIG. 21 is ablock diagram illustrating tiling of a plurality of circuit clusters200C, 200D, connected on adjacent sides 202 through the plurality ofcluster queues 245 (illustrated using arrows to show connection pathsbetween adjacent circuit clusters 200C, 200D), with one or more messagerepeater (or waypoint) circuits 210A connected to the message manager265 of each circuit cluster 200C, 200D and utilized to implement one ormore second communication elements 210 (illustrated using arrows to showconnection paths within the hierarchical interconnect 155), to form asupercluster circuit 185C, 185D. Cluster queues 245 for communicationbetween diagonally adjacent clusters 200C, 200D have not beenillustrated separately in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a block diagramillustrating tiling of a plurality of supercluster circuits 185C, 185D,connected on adjacent sides 203 through the plurality of cluster queues245 (illustrated using arrows to show connection paths between adjacentsupercluster circuits 185C, 185D) with one or more matrix-level messagerepeater (or waypoint) circuits 210A coupled to the supercluster-levelmessage repeater 210A and also utilized to implement one or more thirdcommunication elements 190 (also illustrated using arrows to showconnection paths within the hierarchical interconnect 155), to form amatrix circuit 150D. Such tiling allows both the flat interconnections(full interconnect 275, 295 and cluster queues 245) and hierarchicalinterconnections (through message managers 265 and message repeater (orwaypoint) circuits 210A) to connect seamlessly, respectively, with bothadjacent and non-adjacent circuit clusters 200C, 200D and superclustercircuits 185C, 185D. As previously mentioned, this tiling allows thecircuit architecture to be extended to any desired limit, bounded onlyby the constraints of IC fabrication technology, circuit boards, etc.

FIGS. 23 and 24 are block diagrams illustrating successiveinterconnection levels, and are useful for illustrating both thehierarchical and the flat interconnection systems in accordance with theteachings of the present invention, useful both for the timing of datatransfer, timing closure, and for rapid configuration and/orreconfiguration. As illustrated, successive message repeater (orwaypoint) circuits 210A are utilized from the fabric I/O 204 of theapparatus 100, 140 through matrix 150 levels (interconnect 170, 180)through the supercluster 185 level, with interconnect 195 providing bothhierarchical and peer-to-peer connections. Multiple ICs (apparatuses100, 140) may also be connected through fabric I/O 204 to form a largersystem 206 connecting multiple ICs. Below the supercluster 185 level,the message channels (interconnect 220) connect to a message manager 265for information distribution to and from a circuit cluster 200C, 200D.The interconnect 220 is hierarchical and optionally also peer-to-peerbetween message managers 265 (illustrated as dashed lines). Theinterconnect 170, 180, 195 and 220, in exemplary embodiments, aremessage channels using the protocol and having the message bus structure309 illustrated and discussed with reference to FIG. 4, and transportdata, configuration, and control messages (in payload 307).

The message manager 265, in turn, can distribute or assemble the payload307 to and from multiple sources within a cluster, including theconfiguration and control bus (CC bus) 285, the memory control element(MEMU) 260 _(M), the sequential processing element (SPE) 292, and inselected embodiments, the composite circuit elements 260 over the fullinterconnect 275, 295. The operation of the message manager 265 isdiscussed in greater detail below with reference to FIGS. 32 and 38.

Each one of the message word transmissions, to, from or between any ofthe message repeater (or waypoint) circuits 210A and message managers265, occurs in one clock cycle, which is the basis for a “unit delay” or“hop”. Similarly, any data transmission from an output queue 315 to anyinput queue 320 or a cluster queue 245 input, or from any cluster queue245 output to any input queue 320 or cluster queue 245 input, over thefull interconnect 275, 295, also occurs in one clock cycle (one unitdelay or hop). As discussed below, the execution of an operation by acomposite circuit element 260 also occurs in one clock cycle, also oneunit delay.

FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail a secondexemplary composite circuit element 260A within any of the exemplarycircuit clusters 200 in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention. The composite circuit element 260A differs from the compositecircuit element 260 in several important respects. Unless specificallynoted to the contrary, the composite circuit element 260A functionsidentically to the composite circuit element 260, and reference to oneshall be understood to mean and include the other. For example, inexemplary embodiments, both the composite circuit element 260A and thecomposite circuit element 260 utilize eight contexts, as describedabove. As mentioned above, each of the composite circuit elements 260Ahave the functionality and instruction set of several computationalelements 270 which may be utilized and which share one element interfaceand control 280, rather than a composite circuit element 260 having justone computational element 270 functionality with a corresponding elementinterface and control 280. While illustrated as separate computationalelements 270 to illustrate the multiple functionality, it should benoted that the various computational element 270 are likely to sharecircuitry (hardware) in any actual implementation. The computationalelements 270 of the composite circuit element 260A are also illustratedas having direct feedback (327) within the computational element 270 andindirectly (bus 328) into the input queues 320 (without traversing anoutput queue 315), with the latter referred to a “tight loop”, allowinguse of the output data on the next clock cycle, rather than incurring aunit time delay by traversing from an output queue 315 to an input queueon the next clock cycle. Unit time delays are discussed in greaterdetail below.

As indicated above, each of the computational elements 270 is designedor configured to receive input data from the input queues 320, processthe data, and output the data to the output queues 315 in one clockcycle, as one unit delay. More specifically, each of the computationalelements 270 is designed or configured to receive input data from theinput queues 320, process the data, and output the data in a first clockcycle, as one unit delay. The output data is available to the outputqueues 315 on the rising edge of the next, second clock cycle, duringwhich it enters the output queue 315, is broadcast over the interconnect275, 295 and is input into an input queue 320 or a cluster queue 245 inthe same zone 201 during this second clock cycle, as one unit delay. Acomposite circuit element 260, 260A in the same zone may then processthe received data and have it available at its output queues 315 duringa third clock cycle, also as one unit delay. The cluster queue 245, inturn, may output the data for broadcast over the interconnect 275, 295of the adjacent or diagonally adjacent zone, where it is input into aninput queue 320 or a next cluster queue 245 during third clock cycle,also as one unit delay. Accordingly, transmission of data through acluster queue 245 into an adjacent or diagonally adjacent zone adds oneunit delay compared to transmission of data within the same zone.

Also as illustrated in FIG. 25, the configuration and control memory 330is implemented as configuration and control registers 330A, which arecoupled to the configuration and control bus (CC bus) 285, and can bewritten into by the message manager 265, the sequential processingelement (SPE) 292, or optionally by the element controller 325, forestablishing a configuration, data routing and other control for eachcontext of the computational elements 270, discussed in greater detailwith reference to FIG. 16. For example, for each context, theconfiguration and control information (or word) stored in configurationand control registers 330A is utilized by the correspondingcomputational element 270 for its configuration (when it isconfigurable), for control over its execution of data operations, and bythe input controller 336 and output controller 338, for data routingusing source-based addressing. In addition, configuration and control isalso provided into corresponding registers of a cluster queue 245, asdiscussed in greater detail below with reference to FIG. 26.

Continuing to refer to FIG. 25, input controller 336 and outputcontroller 338 provide additional control functionality, and may beseparate or included within element controller 325, and which work withthe input multiplexer (MUX) 335A and output multiplexer (MUX) 380A,respectively, using source based addressing and backpressure, describedbelow with reference to FIG. 26, to control what data enters the inputqueues 320 and what data exits the output queues 315 for each context.In addition, because multiple outputs may be available from multiplecomputational elements 270, an output selection multiplexer (OUT SELMUX) 314 may be utilized to select which output (with valid datacorresponding to the executing context) is to provide output data to theoutput queues 315, with any other outputs of the non-selectedcomputational elements 270 generally unused. This input multiplexer(MUX) 335A and output multiplexer (MUX) 380A effectively perform as afull (or partial) crossbar switch for the full interconnect 275, 295,capable of coupling any output for any context to any input for anycontext within a zone 201.

More particularly, with the full interconnect bus 279, 295, the inputmultiplexer (MUX) 335A and output multiplexer (MUX) 380A effectivelyperform as partial full-crossbar, a full crossbar because every outputis connected to every input within a zone 201 for simultaneous receptionby every input, and a partial crossbar because it is context-based insome exemplary embodiments, so only one context is transmitted at a timefrom an output. For example, although two inputs may be listening todifferent contexts of the same output, only one input will be active,because an output will transmit data for only one of its contexts in anygiven cycle. Similarly, only one context of an input can receive data ina given cycle, whether it is from the same or different sources. Thesecontext-based restrictions allow the partial full-crossbar to be muchsmaller without sacrificing functionality, as only one context isexecuting on a given cycle (except in the MEMU 260 _(M), in which inputqueues are processed separately by programming each context to read froma different input queue, so multiple contexts may execute concurrently).

In an exemplary embodiment, four input queues 320 and two output queues315 are implemented (not separately illustrated), each for eightcontexts, each thirty-two bits wide (or 17 to 20 bits in other exemplaryembodiments) and two words deep per context, and each is connected tothe full interconnect 275, 295. A given context may also be configuredto use more of any input queues 320 or output queues 315, such as to“merge” queues to provide greater depth, or to concatenate the width ofthe queues, such as to join two 16 bit words into a larger, 32 bit word.In an exemplary embodiment, the full interconnect 275, 295 isimplemented as a bus (dedicated wires or lines) coupling every outputqueue 315 and cluster queue 245 output (from an adjacent zone 201) toevery input queue 320 (via corresponding output multiplexer (MUX) 380Aand input multiplexer (MUX) 335A) and to every cluster queue 245 input(for output to an adjacent zone 201) (and to the other componentscoupled to the full interconnect 275, 295) within a zone 201, so thateach output queue 315 and cluster queue 245 output may transfer dataonto the full interconnect 275, 295 without interference from any otheroutput queue 315 or output of a cluster queue 245. On the input side,each input queue 320 (via input multiplexer (MUX) 335A and inputcontroller 336) is connected through full interconnect 275, 295 to eachdata output within the zone 201 and the output of a cluster queue 245from an adjacent or diagonal zone 201. While each output queue 315 andcluster queue 245 output may transfer data onto the full interconnect275, 295, at any given time, only one context of the output queue 315 orcluster queue 245 output is outputting data during any given clockcycle. As indicated above, such a data transfer occurs in one clockcycle, as one unit delay.

The sequential processing element (SPE) 292 also has some uniquefeatures. As indicated above, the SPE 292 typically shares an elementcontrol and interface 280A with a memory composite circuit element 260M.Using the element control and interface 280A, on a context-by-contextbasis, either the SPE 292 or memory composite circuit element 260M maybe selected for operation. Sharing the same interface, when there isdata in significant inputs and room for data in significant outputs, theelement control and interface 280A will provide an interrupt to the SPE292 to obtain and process the incoming data. Unlike other elements 270,however, the SPE 292 may utilize more than one clock cycle to provideoutput data, and is otherwise not required to be or have a data flowarchitecture. The SPE 292 may also be utilized for other types ofcontrol, such as to start and stop tasks in other composite circuitelements 260, 260A, 260M, through a broadcast message on theconfiguration and control bus 285. The SPE 292 may also use othercomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, 260M to evaluate data andotherwise extend its instruction set, such as to evaluate a condition ordetermine a count, for the SPE 292. In other circumstances, the variouscomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, 260M may utilize the SPE 292, suchas to execute lengthy but infrequently used code or instructions, andprovide a result back to the composite circuit elements 260, 260A, 260M.In addition, the SPE 292 may have different contexts operating ondifferent data sets, which also allows multi-threaded processing,through the same or different program instructions.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary cluster queue 245in accordance with the teachings of the present invention. In exemplaryembodiments, a plurality of cluster queues 245 provide for data transferbetween adjacent zones 201 and clusters 200C, 200D, with the input of acluster queue 245 coupled to a full interconnect 275, 295 of a firstzone and the output of that cluster queue 245 coupled to a fullinterconnect 275, 295 of a second zone 201 within the same cluster 200or an adjacent cluster 200C, 200D or a diagonally coupled zone 201 orcluster 200C, 200D. As illustrated, the exemplary cluster queue 245 isan “empty” composite circuit element 260A, lacking a computationalelement 270 and its corresponding configuration and control, andotherwise having the same or similar components with the same or similarfunctionality which control data transfer. The cluster queue 245 is alsoconfigurable (using configuration/control register 330A), forsource-based addressing with backpressure, and its operation isdiscussed below with reference to FIG. 27.

As mentioned above, source-based addressing is utilized for all of thecomposite circuit elements 260A, cluster queues 245, and for any othercomponent transmitting data on the full interconnect 275, 295. FIG. 27is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplary fullinterconnect 275, 295 bus and protocol within an exemplary circuit zone201 in accordance with the teachings of the present invention, and isuseful for describing data input and output to and from both a compositecircuit element 260A and a cluster queue 245. FIG. 28 is a block diagramillustrating in greater detail an exemplary full interconnect bus 275,295 within an exemplary circuit zone 201 in accordance with theteachings of the present invention, and is useful for illustrating thesignificant extent and the non-hierarchical “flatness” of theinterconnections and the between the composite circuit elements 260,260A and cluster queues 245. FIG. 28 illustrates a zone 201 with fourcomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, each having four input queues 320and two output queues 315, and sixteen cluster queues 245, each havingone input queue 320 and one output queue 315. With regard to theillustrated cluster queues 245, eight cluster queues 245 have inputqueues 320 originating within the zone for data transfer to an adjacentor diagonally adjacent zone using output queues 315 coupled to adjacentor diagonally adjacent full interconnect 275, 295, and eight clusterqueues 245 have input queues 320 coupled to full interconnect 275, 295originating in adjacent or diagonally adjacent zones for data transferwithin the zone using output queues 315 coupled to the zone's fullinterconnect 275, 295. This results in complete interconnection withinthe zone of sixteen data sources to each of twenty four datadestinations, with all communication within the zone occurring with oneunit-delay from a source to a destination.

Referring again to FIG. 27, as illustrated, the full interconnect 275,295 may be logically divided into several components, the data portion276 (n bits wide, such as 32 or 64 bits wide) with data control lines273 (m bits wide, for “tag” bits), and the addressing and additionalcontrol portion (lines or wires), illustrated as source address lines277, valid line 278, deny line 279, and re-try line 274. In an exemplaryembodiment, the data control lines 273 are implemented as two lines(m=2), for transmission of tag bits that are used as part of dataprocessing by a selected configurable elements 270, such as forconditional execution. The tag bits meaning depends on the type ofelement 270. For example, tag bits are used by the memory compositecircuit element 260M to indicate the beginning, middle and end of ablock of data, or in another embodiment, to indicate just the end of adata block. In other embodiments, tag bits may be utilized bycomputational elements 270 to start a counter, for example, using avalue held in one of the input queues, or utilized as carry bits, alsofor example.

The number of source address lines 277 “q” will vary depending upon thenumber of potential sources and their corresponding contexts which areimplemented, such that there are sufficient lines to support the numberof source addresses which may be needed. In exemplary embodiments, thevalid line 278, deny line 279, and re-try line 274 are each one line orwire. As used herein, any producer (e.g., an output queue 320 of acomposite circuit element 260A, output queue 320 of a cluster queue 245)of data is a data “source”, and any consumer (e.g., an input queue 320of a composite circuit element 260A or cluster queue 245) is a data“destination”. Each data source is associated with a unique address,which identifies not only the specific composite circuit element 260A orcluster queue 245, but also the specific context of the compositecircuit element 260A or cluster queue 245 which is or has produced data.When (valid) data is output onto the data lines 276 of the fullinterconnect 275, 295 (via output multiplexer (MUX) 380A under thecontrol of output controller 338), this unique address is output on thesource address lines 277, and a data valid signal is output on line 278,through output controller 338. Essentially, this information isbroadcast on all of the full interconnect 275, 295 coupled to thatoutput queue 315, so that any destination may receive it, as discussedbelow.

At the destination side, with the data, valid and source addressbroadcast on the full interconnect 275, 295, each input controller 336is configured (through the configuration and control information storedin configuration and control registers 330A), to respond to or “listen”for a specific source address (source and its context) on the sourceaddress lines 277. That specific source address will correspond to somecontext of that destination which utilizes the data from that source,either for computation (composite circuit element 260A) or for datatransfer (cluster queue 245). When that specific source address occurson the source address lines 277, provided there is room for data in theinput queues 320 associated with the corresponding destination context,the input controller 336 allows the input multiplexer (MUX) 335A toinput the data into the input queue(s) 320 for that context.

When that specific source address occurs on the source address lines 277but there is no room for data in the input queues 320 associated withthe corresponding destination context, or another context is acceptingdata into the input queues 320, the input controller 336 does not allowthe input multiplexer (MUX) 335A to input the data into the inputqueue(s) 320 for that context (so that the existing data in the inputqueues 320 is not overwritten), and instead issues (transmits) a denysignal on line 279. As only one source (output and context) isbroadcasting during that interval on its dedicated lines of the fullinterconnect 275, 295, no additional addressing is needed for the denysignal. When a source address occurs on the source address lines 277which is not a specific source address to be utilized by thedestination, the destination (through input controller 336) ignores thedata and also does not allow the input multiplexer (MUX) 335A to inputthe data into the input queue(s) 320.

Following a data broadcast, when no deny signal has been received online 279 at the source output controller 338, the output controller 338may consider all of the output data to have been properly received, andallows the storage to be free for overwriting with new data (i.e., sothat there is room in the output queue(s) 315 for more output data).When a deny signal is received on line 279 at the source outputcontroller 338, the output controller 338 does not know whichdestination did not allow input of the data and does not allow theoutput data to be overwritten. Instead, the data source context “backsoff” and the data source context will re-try the data broadcast (rightaway if no other contexts have data to output). More specifically, thedata is output again onto the data lines 276 of the full interconnect275, 295 (via output multiplexer (MUX) 380A under the control of outputcontroller 338), with its unique address output on the source addresslines 277, and a re-try signal is output on line 274, through outputcontroller 338. Essentially, this information is re-broadcast on all ofthe full interconnect 275, 295 coupled to that output queue 315, so thatany destination may receive it again. The re-try signal will indicate topotential destinations that only destinations which previously issuedthe deny signal should now accept the data, and that other destinationswhich previously accepted (and potentially used) the data should ignorethe re-broadcast data. When that specific source address occurs on thesource address lines 277 with the re-try signal is output on line 274,provided there is now room for data in the input queues 320 associatedwith the corresponding destination context, the input controller 336(that previously issued the deny signal) allows the input multiplexer(MUX) 335A to input the data into the input queue(s) 320 for thatcontext. When that specific source address occurs on the source addresslines 277 with the re-try signal is output on line 274, but there stillis no room for data in the input queues 320 associated with thecorresponding destination context, the input controller 336 once againdoes not allow the input multiplexer (MUX) 335A to input the data intothe input queue(s) 320 for that context (so that the existing data inthe input queues 320 is not overwritten), and instead issues (transmits)a deny signal again on line 279.

This data transfer from a source output queue 315 and into a destinationinput queue 320 over the full interconnect 275, 295, and the issuance ofany deny signal, occurs within one clock cycle in exemplary embodiments,namely, with one unit delay. This use of the data deny signal, however,may exert “back pressure” on the corresponding data sources (dataproducers) throughout the apparatus 100, 140, with lack of room in aninput queue 320 backing up data in an output queue 315 which prevents anelement from executing and using data in its input queues, and so on. Inthis way, data is not lost, and can continue to be processed, such asfollowing an incoming data burst. The back pressure is alleviated assoon as room is available in the relevant input and/or output queues320, 315. In addition, although one context in a composite circuitelement 260, 260A may not be able to execute, other contexts may be ableto execute and be chosen to run by the element controller 325. This alsoallows for optimal use of system resources—if the data arriving iscomparatively slow, it is processed and the system waits for more data,while if the data arrives too fast, back pressure is exerted and dataintegrity is maintained, with the flow of data being self-regulating.(While in theory this back pressure could have the potential toeffectively halt the apparatus 100, 140, and require reset signaling toreset and resume operations with new data (rather than continuing towait for the re-broadcast data), in practice such as scenario wouldgenerally only be the result of an improper implementation by aprogrammer who did not match the implementation to the applicationbandwidth or other application data requirements.)

FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating first exemplary zone timingisolation between adjacent zones, in which two clocks are utilized toread from and write to cluster queues 245. As illustrated, in exemplaryembodiments, adjacent or diagonally adjacent zones 201 may be run offthe same or different clocks, with corresponding timing isolationbetween zones achieved through the cluster queues 245, as timingisolation components. As noted herein, a cluster queue 245 spansadjacent or diagonally adjacent zones 201, connecting to correspondingfull interconnects 275, 295 in each respective zone 201. The differentzones may each be run off of different clocks, illustrated as CLK_(Z−1),CLK_(z), and CLK_(Z+1). All in-bound data and out-bound data areconveyed through these isolation components, such that Zone Z, runningwith clock CLK_(Z), runs independently of adjacent Zone Z−1, runningwith clock CLK_(Z−1), and adjacent Zone Z+1, running with clockCLK_(Z+1). As illustrated in FIG. 29, a first cluster queue 245 _(Z−1)is coupled to a first full interconnect 275, 295 in a first zone 201(illustrated as zone Z−1) and to a second full interconnect 275, 295 ina second zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z), and a second cluster queue245 _(Z) is coupled to a the second full interconnect 275, 295 in thesecond zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z) and a third full interconnect275, 295 in a third zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z+1). As illustrated,for each cluster queue 245, its input queue 320 and its output queue 315are clocked from different clock sources, e.g., input queue 320 of firstcluster queue 245 _(Z−1) is clocked from CLK_(Z−1) and its output queue315 is clocked from CLK_(Z).

In this example, all data sourced by Zone Z−1 is write-controlled byWrite Enable WE_(Z−1), but the same data as read by Zone Z isread-controlled by Read Enable RE_(Z). Similarly, all data sourced byZone Z is write-controlled by Write Enable WE_(Z), but the same data asread by Zone Z+1 is read-controlled by Read Enable RE_(Z+1).Accordingly, the input queue 320 of cluster queue 245 _(Z−1) may receivedata on clock CLK_(Z−1), and the output queue 315 of cluster queue 245_(Z−1) may transmit data into the adjacent zone Z on clock CLK_(Z).Similarly, the input queue 320 of cluster queue 245 _(Z) may receivedata on clock CLK_(Z), and the output queue 315 of cluster queue 245_(Z) may transmit data into the next adjacent zone Z+1 on clockCLK_(Z+1). In an exemplary embodiment, these timing isolation components(cluster queue 245) are implemented using First-In-First-Out (FIFO)modules, or using Globally-Asynchronous-Locally-Synchronous (GALS)components, and their application in isolating zones in a configurablearchitecture is new and novel.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating a second exemplary zone timingisolation between adjacent zones, in which one clock is utilized to readfrom and write to cluster queues 245 within a zone, and a differentclock is utilized to read from and write to cluster queues 245 within anadjacent zone. The different zones also may each be run off of differentclocks, illustrated as CLK_(Z−1), CLK_(Z), and CLK_(Z+1). All in-bounddata and out-bound data are conveyed through these isolation components,such that Zone Z, running with clock CLK_(Z), runs independently ofadjacent Zone Z−1, running with clock CLK_(Z−1), and adjacent Zone Z+1,running with clock CLK_(Z+1). As illustrated in FIG. 30, a first clusterqueue 245 _(Z−1) is coupled to a first full interconnect 275, 295 in afirst zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z−1) and to a second fullinterconnect 275, 295 in a second zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z); asecond cluster queue 245 _(Z) is coupled to a the second fullinterconnect 275, 295 in the second zone 201 (illustrated as zone Z) anda third full interconnect 275, 295 in a third zone 201 (illustrated aszone Z+1); and a third cluster queue 245 _(Z+1) is coupled to a thethird full interconnect 275, 295 in the third zone 201 (illustrated aszone Z+1) and a fourth full interconnect 275, 295 in a fourth zone 201(illustrated as zone Z+2). As illustrated, for each cluster queue 245,its input queue 320 and its output queue 315 is clocked from the sameclock, e.g., input queue 320 of first cluster queue 245 _(Z−1) isclocked from CLK_(Z−1) and its output queue 315 is clocked fromCLK_(Z−1).

In this example, all data sourced by Zone Z−1 is write-controlled byWrite Enable WE_(Z−1), but the same data as read by Zone Z isread-controlled by Read Enable REz. Similarly, all data sourced by ZoneZ is write-controlled by Write Enable WE_(Z), but the same data as readby Zone Z+1 is read-controlled by Read Enable RE_(Z+1). In an exemplaryembodiment, these timing isolation components (cluster queues 245) areimplemented using Data Register File (DF) modules. In such anembodiment, Zone clocks, Zi, are synchronous although not necessarilyidentical. If not identical, pulse width handling for read and writecontrols, REi and WEi, must accommodate disparate periods of the sourceclocks. Use of these techniques to isolate zones in a configurablearchitecture is new novel.

Other clocking schemes may also be utilized, such as each zone 201 andits cluster queues 245 clocked by its own (same) clock, or by all zones201 and cluster queues 245 clocked by a single clock.

FIG. 31 is a block and timing diagram illustrating exemplary unit delaytiming and timing closure for data transfer, and unit delay timing andtiming closure for configuration and/or reconfiguration, in accordancewith the teachings of the present invention. Two advantages of theapparatus 100, 140 architecture are the ability to predict timing ofdata operations and have timing closure without undue computation, andto configure and/or reconfigure readily, allowing such configuration andreconfiguration in the field. As indicated above, each data operationand point-to-point data transfer of data or configuration/control occurswithin one time period or “unit delay”, illustrated in FIG. 31 as adelta “Δ”, typically one clock cycle in exemplary embodiments. Asillustrated, any word of a message being transferred between the system(fabric) I/O 204 and a message repeater 210A, between successive messagerepeaters 210A, between a message repeater 210A and a message manager265, or between successive message managers 265 (when coupled forpeer-to-peer communication), occurs within one unit delay, for data,configuration, and control. Any data transfer of a data word on the fullinterconnect 275, 295 within a zone (such as the illustrated first zone201 ₁) occurs within one unit delay, such as between the compositecircuit elements 260, 260A, between composite circuit elements 260, 260Aand a cluster queue 245, and so on. Any data word transfer through acluster queue 245 between two adjacent or diagonal zones occurs withinone unit delay, such as between the illustrated first zone 201 ₁ and theillustrated second zone 201 ₂. Any data word transfer on the fullinterconnect 275, 295 within another zone (such as the illustratedsecond zone 201 ₂) occurs within one unit delay, such as between thecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, between composite circuit elements260, 260A and a cluster queue 245, and so on.

Similarly, configuration and control information may also bedisseminated or copied rapidly, with any word of configuration andcontrol information distributed by the message manager 265 or the SPE292 within a cluster 200-200D to or from the element interface andcontrol 280, 280A of a composite circuit element 260, 260A alsooccurring within one unit delay.

As mentioned above, while configurable devices such as FPGAs are widelyused, they are virtually impossible to reconfigure in the field, andeven more importantly, while the device is in use in the field. Morespecifically, when an FPGA is powered up, it is loaded with a storedconfiguration file for one or more applications that have beenpreviously mapped, placed and routed, with timing closure. While inoperation, however, such FPGAs cannot reconfigure with a new mapping,placement and/or routing. One of the many reasons for this is theunpredictability and indeterminacy of operation timing, which can varywidely in such a device depending upon how the task, operation orprogram is compiled for and mapped to the architecture (how a task'sbehavioral netlist is mapped to the available components of the FPGA orother configurable logic (mapping)), where on the integrated circuit atask is located (task placement), and how the data path connections forthe operation are routed (routing).

More specifically, these traditional configurable logic devices sufferfrom three largely unpredictable steps in their configuration sequence:(1) map, (2) place, and (3) route. This has the further result ofunpredictability of timing, and large timing variances with differentmappings, placements and routings.

Mapping is converting the customer behavioral netlist into constructs ofthe target technology. In this step, the prior art Mapper may invoketarget library structures and synthesis optimizations to partitionbehavioral statements into the function blocks of the targetconfigurable architecture. An optimal Mapper may “rip-up-and-retry”various mappings until the input netlist converts into a structuralnetlist consuming fewer resources than available in the selected device.This result is then passed to the Placer.

Starting with the mapped structural netlist, the prior art Placer usesvarious heuristics (such as simulated annealing) to match each netlistinstance with particular resources within the selected devicearchitecture. An optimal Placer uses timing-driven placement todetermine best placement and continues until its best guess is that allplaced items should be capable of actually being routed. This result isthen passed to the Router.

The prior art Router, beginning with the placed structural netlist, thenuses various algorithms, such as“sort-by-loads-and-begin-routing-with-least-loaded-nets”, to see if itcan first, route all nets, and second, meet timing. An optimal Routerwill use timing-driven routing. If timing is not being met, the Routerwill ‘rip-up-and-retry’ already routed nets by allocating to themdifferent route resources. For example, an identical task may be placedidentically on an FPGAs and CLBs and yet routed differently, resultingin different data path delays, thereby requiring post-route timinganalyses.

If after a much longer time (usually hours) the Router still cannot meettiming, it may send the job back to the Placer to obtain a new de novoplacement. Similarly, if after many iterations between the prior artRouter and the Placer, timing still cannot be met, an optimal map, placeand route (MPR) process will send the job back to the prior Mapper toobtain a different allocation of instances-to-resources, beginning themap, place and route process all over from scratch.

When finally all these iterations succeed in a route that meets usertiming, a target netlist is finally output. Note that finally timingclosure cannot be known until after all these iterations—in the worstcase, a triple nested loop. This is one of the major reasons it isimpractical to implement partial reconfiguration in the field with thecurrent prior art.

It is well known that the map, place and route determinations for FPGAsand CLBs takes hours upon hours. In addition, performing a second map,place and route determination using the same behavioral netlist mayresult in a different mapping, placement and routing, with differenttiming results and a different operating frequency.

In contrast, fixed devices such as ASICs have a known timing, with allarchitecture placement and routing completed before IC manufacture.Having been designed for a specific purpose, such ASICs are notconfigurable and cannot be utilized to perform new functionality thatwas not included in the original design.

It is in light of this map, place and route problem of the prior artthat the concept of a “unit delay”, “unit time delay” or a “unit timeinterval”, as used throughout this disclosure, should be understood. Aunit delay or unit time interval of this disclosure should not beconfused with a recurring, specified time interval such as a clockperiod (or a clocking frequency) for a device. Rather, the intendedmeaning of unit delay and unit time interval is that of a constant orguaranteed, and known in advance, maximum time interval for any and alldata operations and data word transfers, within a zone 201 (or region)of the IC, and between zones (or regions) of the inventive IC, whichprovides a readily known and easily determined timing closure for areconfigurable integrated circuit. This constant time interval for alldata operations and data transfers within a zone 201 (or other region)is without regard to and is totally independent of how a task may bemapped to (or compiled for) the reconfigurable architecture, thelocations of the task placement in the reconfigurable architecture, andthe routing or connections for the application data for the task.

As discussed in greater detail herein, this unit time interval isenabled by several inventive architectural features utilized in theapparatus 100, 140. First is the timing isolation provided by theelement interface and control, with local data storage in the inputqueues 320 and output queues 315, such that data is present in an outputqueue 315 within one unit time interval, regardless of the type orlocation of a composite circuit element 260, 260A. Second is the fullinterconnect bus 275, 295 connecting every output queue 315 to everyinput queue 320 within a zone 201, so that all possible data routingwithin a zone 201 is available to complete a data transfer and iscompletely deterministic a priori. Accordingly, the unit interval timingwithin a zone 201 is completely deterministic and completely independentof both placement and routing. Third, timing is also isolated anddeterministic between adjacent and diagonally adjacent zones 201,through the use of cluster queues 245, which also have a known unitdelay.

Accordingly, this constant, known time interval, referred to herein as a“unit delay” or “unit time interval”, is completely scalable within theinventive architecture, with the simple addition of one unit timeinterval for any data transfer between adjacent or diagonally adjacentzones 201, and with the simple addition of one to three unit timeintervals or delays for any data transfer between clusters 200-200D,depending upon if the data transfer is through one cluster queue 245(one unit delay), or through two cluster queues 245 to traverse acluster 200-200D completely (two unit delays), or over the interconnect220 (from a first message manager 265 in a first cluster 200-200D to amessage repeater 210A (one unit delay) to a second message manager 265in a second cluster 200-200D (one unit delay) to a composite circuitelement 260, 260 in the second cluster 200-200D (one unit delay) (threeunit delays total)), for example. And unless there is a contention orconflict for resources, this is also true for the loading of additionaltasks into the inventive reconfigurable architecture. This inventiveconstant time interval for completion of any and all data operations anddata transfers within a zone enables a readily calculable and knowntiming closure in advance or a priori from the netlist, which is a hugeadvancement over the prior art.

Because of the unit-delay characteristic of the inventive architecture,with the full interconnect bus 275, 295 coupling all output queues 315to all input queues 320 within a zone 201, the route phase is obviatedwithin a zone 201, with only mapping and binding steps required(discussed in greater detail below with reference to FIGS. 11, 12 and14), and with routing only required for data transfers beginning at thenon-adjacent zone 201 and inter-cluster 200-200D levels. But again, anyof those possible data transfers also have known unit delays.

The mapping step is similar, converting the input behavioral netlistinto target structures, and binding is similar to placing, in thatparticular locations are selected. But unlike the Placer of prior artwhich must guess whether one location is more timely than another, alllocations in a unit-delay regions (zones 201) are of equal weight. Forexample, the data operation “A=B·(x+y)” may be mapped to one adder(x+y=z) and one multiplier (B·z), or two multipliers (B·x=w and B·y=q,respectively) and one adder (w+q), and regardless of this mapping todifferent composite circuit elements 260, 260A, the timing is the same,two unit time intervals. Moreover, all locations in adjacent regionscarry known unit-delay penalties, of one to three unit delays for datatransfers between zones 201 or clusters 200-200D. This practicallyreduces the timing analysis to a simple matter of counting unit delaysto ascertain if the bandwidth requirements of a given source-destinationconnection are met.

The other function of the binder, as discussed in greater detail below,is to insert the connection information into the final netlist. Forexample, once source and destination instance locations are selected,that connection information is written into the netlist to ensure thatall destinations “subscribe” to the appropriate sources (as identifiedby their locations in the hierarchy).

An optimal Binder for the inventive architecture uses bandwidthparameters to determine when source and destination interconnections arewithin the required number of unit delays. If the Binder cannot meet allbandwidth requirements, it may request a remapping of the structuralnetlist, such as to place tasks within a selected zone 201 (or adjacentzones 201) or cluster 200-200D.

It should be noted that “timing closure” in the inventive architectureis known after the Binding step. This is a significant advantage overprior art, since prior art must calculate, on average, billions ofbit-width timing paths with pico-second granularity to determine timingclosure, whereas the invention need only calculate thousands ofbus-width timing paths with unit-delay granularity to determine timingclosure. This is at least 6 orders of magnitude faster!

Accordingly, as used herein, unit delay or unit time interval means aconstant, maximum time interval which is independent of task mapping (orcompilation), task placement, and task data routing. In an exemplaryembodiment, a unit time delay may be determined by a longest paththrough the composite circuit elements 260, 260A, which is then themaximum time interval for a data operation (with data transfersgenerally faster). This maximum time interval is then utilized to set aselected clock frequency, such that in an exemplary embodiment, theperiod of a clock may equal a unit time interval.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail exemplaryinterconnections between and among selected circuit components in acircuit cluster in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention. As illustrated, in exemplary embodiments, dedicated channelsmay be utilized, with memory channel 282 and masterless memory (MLM)channel 283 utilized between the message manager 265 and the memorycontrol element (MCE) 485 (which comprises a memory composite circuitelement 260M and a cluster memory (RAM) 475), an SPE message channel(SMC) between the message manager 265 and the sequential processorelement (SPE) 292, an instruction data bus between the memory compositecircuit element 260M and the sequential processor element (SPE) 292, anda configuration and control bus (CC bus) 285 between and among themessage manager 265, the sequential processor element (SPE) 292, thememory composite circuit element 260M, and the element interfaces (andcontrol) 280, 280A of the composite circuit elements 260, 260A(illustrated in FIG. 25). In addition, an optional channel 221 may beutilized for additional signaling, such as for reset signaling,interrupt signaling, or any other purpose, for example and withoutlimitation. The structure and protocols of these various channels willbe discussed below with reference to FIGS. 33-36. The various othercommunication channels and protocols of the exemplary embodiments, suchas the messaging channels for interconnect 155 and data and addressingchannels of the full interconnect 275, 295, have been addressedpreviously.

FIG. 33 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymemory channel 282 and protocol within an exemplary circuit cluster200-200D in accordance with the teachings of the present invention. Amemory channel word 401 comprises three fields, a control field 402, anaddress field 403, and a data payload field 404, with the memory channel282 comprising lines or wires which correspond to these fields, and canbe used for both data write and data copy messages. In an exemplaryembodiment, the control field 402 is typically four bits, a first bitindicating that the address is valid (AdrVal signal from the messagemanager 265 on line 411), a second bit indicating that a memory write isenabled (WE signal from the message manager 265 on the line 412), athird bit providing an acknowledgement (ACK signal from the memorycontrol element (MCE) 485 on line 413), and a fourth bit indicating thatthe memory control element (MCE) 485 is in a ready state (Ready signalfrom the memory control element (MCE) 485 on line 416). The messagemanager 265 uses the address field 403 to indicate an address in clustermemory (RAM) 475 for either a read or write operation (address lines407), with the payload field containing the data from the messagemanager 265 to write to cluster memory (RAM) 475 (write data (wdat)lines 408) or containing the data read from cluster memory (RAM) 475 andprovided to the message manager 265 (read data (rdat) lines 409). Themessage manager 265 may convert the memory channel word 401 to a messagechannel word 310 for further transfer on interconnect 155 (removecontrol and address fields 402, 403, providing strobe field 301, tagsfield 302 and an address header field 305, with the read data (rdat 409)payload 404 becoming payload 307 in one or more messages), andvice-versa, when messages are received from the interconnect 155(removing strobe field 301, tags field 302 and address header field 305,providing control and memory address fields 402 and 403, with thepayload data 307 becoming write data in payload 404).

FIG. 34 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymasterless messaging channel and protocol within an exemplary circuitcluster in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.Masterless messaging is discussed in greater detail below, and allowscreation of messages without the involvement of the SPE 292. Amasterless messaging channel word 423 comprises four fields, a messagecontrol field 417, a buffer control field 419, an address generationfield 421, and a data payload field 422, with the masterless messagingchannel 283 comprising lines or wires which correspond to these fields,and can be used for both data write and data copy messages. In anexemplary embodiment, the message control field 417 is used to designatemessage size, message status, and a message maximum, from the messagemanager 265 to the memory control element (MCE) 485 or vice-versa (lines428), and effectively perform a handshake between the message manager265 and the memory control element (MCE) 485. The buffer control field419 is used to control the transport of masterless messages, andincludes bits for buffer destination, buffer size, buffer available,buffer status, and buffer ready (lines 429). The address generator modefield 421 is provided by the memory control element (MCE) 485 (lines424). The payload field containing the data from the message manager 265to write to cluster memory (RAM) 475 (write data (wdat) lines 426) orcontaining the data read from cluster memory (RAM) 475 and provided tothe message manager 265 (read data (rdat) lines 427). The messagemanager 265 also may convert the masterless messaging channel word 401to a message channel word 310 and vice-versa similarly to the processdescribed above.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplaryinstruction data bus 293 or channel and protocol within an exemplarycircuit cluster in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention. Three different kinds of information may be transmitted onthe instruction data bus 293, a SPE data read 431, a SPE data write 432,and a SPE instruction fetch 433, each with corresponding lines or wireson the instruction data bus 293. In an exemplary embodiment, the SPEdata read 431 comprises three fields, a read control field 434, a readaddress field 436, and a read data payload field 437. The read controlfield 434 consists of bits denoting a request or a wait (lines 452). Theread address field 436 indicates an address in cluster memory (RAM) 475for a read operation (address lines 449), with the read data payloadfield 437 containing the data read from cluster memory (RAM) 475 andprovided to the SPE 292 (lines 451). Also in an exemplary embodiment,the SPE data write 432 comprises three fields, a write control field438, a write address field 439, and a write data payload field 441. Thewrite control field 434 consists of bits denoting a request, wait, byteenable, and priority (lines 448). The write address field 439 indicatesan address in cluster memory (RAM) 475 for a write operation (addresslines 446), with the write data payload field 441 containing the data towrite to cluster memory (RAM) 475 (lines 447). Also in an exemplaryembodiment, the SPE instruction fetch 433 comprises three fields, aninstruction control field 442, an instruction address field 443, and aninstruction data payload field 444. The instruction control field 442consists of bits denoting a request, wait, and wake (lines 456). Theinstruction address field 443 indicates an address in cluster memory(RAM) 475 for a read operation (address lines 453), with the instructiondata payload field 444 containing the instruction read from clustermemory (RAM) 475 (lines 454).

FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplaryconfiguration and control bus 285 or channel and protocol within anexemplary circuit cluster in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention. In an exemplary embodiment, the configuration word461 comprises three fields, a control field 462, an address field 463,and a data payload field 464 for read or write data. The control field462 consists of bits denoting a write enable and either a read or writedirection, and the address field 463 indicates a location in theconfiguration and control register 330A for a read or a write operation(control and address lines 468). The element controller 325 (for acomposite circuit element 260A) or a queue controller 325A (for acluster queue 245) decodes the control and address lines for thecorresponding read or write operation in the configuration and controlregister 330A. The data payload field 464 contains the data read from orwritten to the configuration and control register 330A (lines 466, 467).

The element controller 325 and configuration and control register 330Acontain internal combinational and/or finite state machine logic whichcan be utilized for several different, significant features enabled withthe configuration and control bus 285. First, matching circuitry withinthe element controller 325 allows the element controller 325 to matchtask IDs (discussed in greater detail below) with a task ID includedwithin a configuration message broadcast on the configuration andcontrol bus 285, updating the contexts with the matching task ID withthe broadcast contents. As a consequence, configuration messages can bebroadcast on the configuration and control bus 285 to multiple compositecircuit elements 260, 260A, 260M and cluster queues 245, for concurrentor simultaneous updating or configuring of tasks, such as to turn a taskon or off at about the same time. The configuration and control bus 285may also be utilized to read back configuration and status data, usingthe embedded logic within the element controller 325 and/orconfiguration and control register 330A. In addition, the elementcontroller 325, configuration and control register 330A andconfiguration and control bus 285 can utilize different operationalmodes, discussed in greater detail below, such as control forbreakpoints, single-stepping, interrupts and other debugging functionsfor the reconfigurable IC.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymemory composite circuit element 260M with cluster memory (RAM) 475,forming a memory control element (MCE) 485, within an exemplary circuitcluster in accordance with the teachings of the present invention. Thememory control element (MCE) 485 comprises a memory composite circuitelement 260M coupled to cluster memory (RAM) 475. In addition to the useof the memory control element (MCE) 485 in exemplary clusters 200C and200D, in the context of other various exemplary clusters, such as thecluster 200B illustrated in FIG. 7, the memory control element (MCE) 485may be viewed equivalently as a combination of the memory compositecircuit element 260M and any of the various other second memory elements(255). As illustrated, the memory composite circuit element 260M isshown slightly differently than other composite circuit elements 260A toillustrate some unique features. For ease of explanation, the internalcomponents of an element interface and control 280A are not separatelyillustrated, but are generally included within the memory compositecircuit element 260M (element controller 325, configuration and controlregisters 330A, input controller 336, output controller 338, inputmultiplexer (MUX) 335A, output multiplexer (MUX) 380A, output selectionmultiplexer (OUT SEL MUX) 314). Stated another way, the elementinterface and control 280B of the memory composite circuit element 260Mincludes the components of an element interface and control 280A, alongwith additional components, such as the input and output port array 490discussed below, along with additional inputs and outputs on the variousbus structures discussed above.

A plurality of input queues 320 and output queues 315 are includedwithin the input and output port array 490. In an exemplary embodiment,eight (rather than four) input queues 320 and eight (rather than two)output queues 315 are utilized in the memory composite circuit element260M. In an exemplary embodiment, the cluster memory (RAM) 475 iscomprised of sixteen independent blocks of synchronous single portmemory (RAM) with 16 separate interfaces (provided by memory bankinterface 498), each 2K (or 4K in other embodiments). In addition, thememory composite circuit element 260M has sixteen contexts and mayexecute multiple contexts simultaneously or concurrently, rather than asingle context, providing multi-threading. As a consequence, whenseparate parts of the cluster memory (RAM) 475 are utilized (i.e., nocollisions or contentions for significant inputs and outputs), thememory composite circuit element 260M supports up to sixteensimultaneous or concurrent accesses (memory reads and memory writes) tocluster memory (RAM) 475, avoiding the typical processor-memorybottleneck. This also allows the IC area of the cluster memory (RAM) 475to be smaller compared to implementation of a multiport RAM, although amultiport RAM may also be utilized within the scope of the disclosure.In addition, the memory composite circuit element 260M is autonomous andcan read or write a logical block of memory (which may or may notcoincide with physical boundaries) without any control from the SPE 292or other processor.

This conjunction of a distributed and independent memory provided by thecluster memory (RAM) 475 with the full interconnect 275, 295 (with inputmultiplexer (MUX) 335A and output multiplexer (MUX) 380A) crossbarswitching capabilities is highly unique, allowing coupling manydifferent sources to the memory at the same time, a dynamic access withmultiple input and output points, and further providing multi-threadedoperation. In addition, the memory control element (MCE) 485 alsoprovides a bridging mechanism between the different kinds of informationand data transfer utilized in the apparatus 100, 140, bridging thedifferent types of messaging busses and protocols, such as the data flowof the full interconnect 275, 295 and the message switching of theinterconnect 220 and message manager 265.

In an exemplary embodiment, there are two memory composite circuitelements 260M per cluster 200C, 200D, which share the cluster memory(RAM) 475 and which share an address generator array 494 of programmableaddress generators 495. In an exemplary embodiment, sixteen programmableaddress generators 495 are utilized. Each address generator 495 isflexible and may be used for one dimensional block reads and writes,single-word access, and FIFO reads and writes. A pair of addressgenerators 495 may be used for two dimensional block reads and writes,providing inner and outer loop counting. In addition, the addressgenerators 495 may process streams of data without intervention of themessage manager 265 or SPE 292 to manage initiation, termination, orinner loop operations.

The memory composite circuit element 260M is also considerably moresophisticated, multi-threaded and configurable or programmable than aDMA controller. The memory composite circuit element 260M allows memoryaccesses to be defined for the data structure, rather than vice-versa,such as 1D, 2D, 3D, row and column skipping and striping, wrap around,partitioning, and hard limits, in addition to random access, alsoallowing memory storage when the block size is not fixed and known inadvance. The cluster memory (RAM) 475 may be used for storage ofapplication data; messaging data; control; configuration; localinstruction and data storage for sequential execution instruction setprocessing within the apparatus 100, 140, such as for a SPE 292;sources, sinks and intermediate buffers for messaging circuitry. Thememory composite circuit element 260M also supports local and remoteaddress generation, memory access arbitration, and memory boundingfunctions. Memory addresses may be generated externally and modifiedwithin the memory composite circuit element 260M in a number of ways,including but not limited to address masking, modulo two addition, andaddress shifting. Address generation circuitry may additionally beremotely controlled and used by configuration and control bus circuitry

The memory control element (MCE) 485 may be used to support any or allof the following functionality in a reconfigurable IC such as apparatus100, 140: (1) simultaneous access to multiple memory banks; (2) sharedmemory access; (3) memory access ordering; (4) memory region protection;(5) memory address generation; (6) memory address modification; (7)system bus address generation; (8) memory access limiting based ondata-set size and type; (9) memory access reuse based on data-set sizeand type; (10) trigger controlled memory access; and (11) dynamicaddressing parameter access via datapath ports (full interconnect 275,295).

Referring to FIG. 37, the memory composite circuit element 260M receivesand transfers data to and from multiple different sources using thebusses and protocols discussed above, as multiple and different classesof memory ports (with arbitration discussed below), including to andfrom the message manager 265, the SPE 292, the full interconnect 275,295, the CC bus 285, and the cluster memory (RAM) 475. In addition to anelement interface and control 280B and the input and output port array490 with the various connections mentioned above, the memory compositecircuit element 260M comprises a port arbitration circuit 492, theaddress generator array 494, a memory bank mapping and arbitrationcircuit 496, and a memory bank interface 498.

The message manager 265 port or bus 282 consists of a 17-bit addressbus, an address valid indicator, an address source indicator, a writeindicator, and a 16-bit data bus as inputs to the memory compositecircuit element 260M. When the address source and valid indicators areset, an address generator 495 is selected by the value of the addressbus bits and that address generator 495 is used to generate the addressto cluster memory (RAM) 475 (“adgen” mode), and the associated datacount output of the memory composite circuit element 260M is monitoredby the message manager 265 logic. When an address valid indicator is setwithout the assertion of the address source indicator, the messagemanager 265 address bus (407) provides the address to cluster memory(RAM) 475. When a write indicator is asserted with address valid, datais routed to the appropriate memory bank from the 16-bit data bus inputbased on the address. If a write indicator is not asserted with theaddress valid, data is routed from cluster memory (RAM) 475 to the16-bit message manager 265 output data bus 409 coupled to the memorycomposite circuit element 260M.

The SPE 292 port type consists of three separate interfaces to thememory control element (MCE) 485 described above, an instruction readinterface, a data read interface, and a data write interface. Eachinterface consists of an address bus, a data bus, and memory requestinput along with a memory wait output. Address and request inputs fromthe SPE 292 are used by the bank mapping and arbitration module 496 todetermine whether to assert a memory wait to the SPE 292 and access theproper memory bank based on the address.

The full interconnect 275, 295 port type is under execution contextcontrol and consists of interfaces to the cluster 200C, 200D via thememory composite circuit element 260M input 320 and output queues 315.Seventeen bit addresses are generated internally via the addressgenerator array 494 by association with one of the sixteen contexts ofthe memory composite circuit element 260M. Address and port collisiondetermine whether an input or output queue is written to or read fromthe cluster memory (RAM) 475. Resource allocation of full interconnect275, 295 ports and address generators 495 is specified via the executioncontext definition.

The memory bank interface 498 provides an array of sixteen separateinterfaces to the blocks of cluster memory (RAM) 475. Each RAM blockinterface consists of a clock input, a 12-bit address input, 16-bit datainput, a 2-bit write enable input, a 1-bit chip enable input, and a16-bit data output port. Memory striping provides full-rate simultaneousread and write access to the memory core, by alternating reads withwrites to different memory blocks. Address pattern generation logicprovides access to separate physical memory banks on each cycle. Byaccessing separate stripes of memory, read and write interfaces are ableto simultaneously access a data buffer stored in cluster memory (RAM)475.

The memory bank mapping and arbitration circuit 496 and memory bankinterface 498 are couplable to all the defined port types and providethe direct interface and arbitration to cluster memory (RAM) 475. TheSPE 292 interface only connects to this portion of the memory compositecircuit element 260M for cluster memory (RAM) 475 access management. Themessage manager 265 ports are also coupled to the memory bank mappingand arbitration circuit 496 and memory bank interface 498, butadditionally receive status information directly from the addressgenerator array 494 to support addressing via the address generatorarray 494.

Memory bank arbitration identifies and resolves simultaneous accesses tothe physical memory banks comprising the cluster memory (RAM) 475. Alladdress sources (message manager 265, SPE 292, full interconnect 275,295) are gated by their validity indicator and compared for each accesscycle. When two or more address sources are targeting the same physicalmemory bank, an arbitration circuit (492, 496) determines which addresssource is allowed access and asserts a wait indicator to the sourcewhich was not selected. In an exemplary embodiment, a fixed-priorityarbitration scheme is implemented, with highest priority provided to themessage manager 265 interface, followed by the full interconnect 275,295 interface, SPE 292 instruction interface, and lastly the SPE 292data interfaces. For the full interconnect 275, 295 interface, the portarbitration circuit 492 implements a second priority arbitration tohandle collisions between multiple execution contexts, with the lowestnumbered address generator 495 being used allocated the highest priorityaccess to cluster memory (RAM) 475 in the event of contention. The sameinputs used by the port arbitration circuit 492 to determine a collisionare also used to determine the multiplexer controls (in memory bankinterface 498) that map a memory composite circuit element 260M port tothe physical cluster memory (RAM) 475 bank controls.

In an exemplary embodiment, the port arbitration circuit 492 and memorybank mapping and arbitration circuit 496 perform many of the executioncontrol functions of an element controller 325, 325A, which therefore isnot required as a separate component in many implementations. Portarbitration of port arbitration circuit 492 is a function of thecontext-based full interconnect 275, 295 port type based on the contextconfiguration instructions. Each full interconnect 275, 295 context isdefined by a set of control registers written and read via the CC bus285 port that define the context execution parameters, memory operationtype, input queue parameters, and output queue parameters. The contextexecution parameters, among other things, define the execution order andpriority of the context defining it as either a lead or not a leadcontext in an execution chain and the next context to execute in thechain (described in greater detail below with reference to FIG. 16). Thememory operation type register defines the access direction (read orwrite), underlying data structure, and an address generator 495 in thearray 494. Input and output queue parameters define on a queue-by-queuebasis the queue type, depth, significance to the context, andsource/destination ID (for input/output queues.)

The port arbitration circuit 492 determines context execution based onall of the above configuration parameters as well as the state of theaddress generator array 494 and memory bank mapping and arbitrationcircuit 496. When a wait state is asserted due to either an addressgenerator 495 in the array 494 or a collision detected by the memorybank mapping and arbitration circuit 496, the associated executioncontext is not executed for that cycle and input queue 320 data is notconsumed. In the absence of a wait, input port arbitration is a functionof queue contention, queue state, and execution chain requirements.Contexts are ready to run based on queue state and the execution chain.When there is data in the significant input queue 320 contexts, andthere is room in the associated output queue 315 contexts, the queuestate component of the ready-to-run function is met. Depending on thememory operation type, input queue meaning differs. Some modes requireaddress or data information to be supplied via an input queue. For allmodes, input queues which are not interpreted as either address or datato the cluster memory (RAM) 475 act as trigger inputs. Trigger inputsare specified as significant to the arbitration logic, and all triggerinputs as well as any information inputs queues must be non-empty forthe context to execute. For output queues 315, the queue state isupdated when an acknowledge from the full interconnect 275, 295destination is received or, alternatively, a deny is not received. Whendeny is received or an acknowledge is not received, data is held in theoutput queue 320. When all execution chain requirements are met (thecontext leads or is the next in an execution chain) this portion of theready-to-run function is met. Full interconnect 275, 295 input andoutput queue contention is checked for all ready-to-run contexts and inthe absence of contention all contexts that are ready have their memoryaccess executed. When port contention does occur, a round robinarbitration scheme determines which of the conflicting contexts isexecuted.

Address generation for the full interconnect 275, 295 (and under certainconditions the message manager 265) port type is accomplished via theaddress generator array 494. In exemplary embodiment, the addressgeneration array 494 consists of eight coupled pairs of addressgenerators for a total of 16 address generators which, as mentionedabove, may be shared or not shared by memory composite circuit elements260M. Each address generator 495 is capable of independent or pairedoperation with operational parameters defined by the associatedexecution context's memory operation type register. Every addressgenerator 495 contains a set of CC bus 285 memory mapped registersfurther defining the memory access parameters for that address generator495. The address generator 495 specific registers define memory regionswithin the physical cluster memory (RAM) 475 by specifying minimum andmaximum address for the region, the current address to memory, thestride to calculate the next address in memory, an access count, and amaximum number of accesses to perform. Each address generator 495further comprises of a set of two's complement adders, comparison logic,and an access counter. Independent of the operational mode of thecontext's address generator 495, the minimum and maximum addressregisters define the boundaries of addresses that may be generated bythe address generator 495. Addresses greater than maximum for positivestrides, or less than minimum for negative strides, are wrapped backinto the valid address range effectively by a modulo function.

In an exemplary embodiment, the address generators 495 support 1-D datablock addressing for read or write using a single address generator 495and one context; 2-D data block addressing for read or write using anaddress generator 495 pair and one context; externally generatedaddressing from a full interconnect 275, 295 input queue using anaddress generator 495 and one context; and FIFO addressing for read andwrite using a single address generator 495 and two contexts.

Each address generator 495 provides state information for use by theport arbitration circuit 492 and available to the context output queues320: 1-D and 2-D address generators 495 report when a data block iscompleted (access count=max access); externally generated addressing hasno blocking state to the port arbitration circuit 492; and FIFOaddressing provides FULL, EMPTY and watermark conditions. Based on theassociated context's memory operation type, cluster memory (RAM) 475block done conditions result in: (1) the context not being executableuntil cleared via the CC bus 285; (2) further data accesses restart theaddress generator 495 at the minimum or initialized address setting; or(3) addressing continues starting at the last calculated address.

Done status is optionally output from the memory composite circuitelement 260M for full interconnect 275, 295 ports based upon the memoryaccess type and address generation parameters. In 1-D block mode, Donesignals the last word of a data block of the configured size, while in2-D blocks, Done may be generated on either the last word of arow/column or the last word of the entire 2-D data block. Statusindicators are provided on the full interconnect 275, 295 output portsto indicate memory access state and are available for use by control andprocessing logic within the apparatus 100, 140. Additionally, optionalor additional control lines of the full interconnect 275, 295 inputports may force the memory context to a Done state.

Restart capabilities of the address generation logic are specified on acontext-by-context basis. The supported restart modes implemented inexemplary embodiment provide three different restart conditions foraddress generation; no restart, restart at minimum, restart at next. Norestart mode will disable address generation upon the first completionof the data block, with the block size defined as part of the addressgeneration operating parameters. The Done status of a no restart modeblock may be cleared via a configuration memory space access to theaddress generator parameters. Restart at minimum will automaticallyrestart address generation for a context at the end of a data block andset the next memory address in the generation scheme to the minimumaddress value defined in the address generator parameters. Restart atnext mode contexts will automatically restart the address generationpattern using the last calculated address as the start of a new datablock.

The FIFO (first in, first out) mode of the memory composite circuitelement 260M is particularly unique and innovative. One context of thememory composite circuit element 260M is programmed for a FIFO readoperation, and another context is programmed for a FIFO write operation.Both operations may use the same address generator 495.

For FIFO mode, the memory composite circuit element 260M uses thefollowing parameters and addresses: (1) a base_address: the startinglocation/minimum address for the FIFO contents in RAM, and there may bemultiple base addresses, such as an even base address and an odd baseaddress; (2) max_depth: the maximum number of words in the FIFO; (3) aread_pointer: contains the physical RAM address of the next location inthe FIFO to be read; (4) read_offset: the offset from the minimumaddress in the FIFO to the next location to be read, such thatread_pointer=base_address+read_offset×item_size (e.g., item_size=2bytes.); (5) write_pointer: contains the physical RAM address of thenext location in the FIFO to be written; (6) write_offset: the offsetfrom the minimum address in the FIFO of the next location to be written,such that write_pointer=base_address+write_offset×item_size; (7)cur_depth: the number of valid words currently in the FIFO, such thatwhen the write_pointer>read_pointer, thecur_depth=write_offset−read_offset; and (8) a watermark: a monitor forwhen the current depth of the FIFO reaches a high or low level (numberof valid words). The address generator 495 contains two base addresses,a write pointer, an internal write offset, a read offset, and the logicneeded to detect the watermark conditions. The Write Pointer, WriteOffset and the Read Offset wrap when the FIFO's max_depth is met orexceeded. When an offset wraps, it is re-initialized. When two differentbase addresses are used, one for even offsets and another for oddoffsets, the memory composite circuit element 260M can performsimultaneous read and write operations in a FIFO mode. For example, aread operation may occur using a read pointer set to a memory addresshaving an odd number, while a concurrent write operation may occur usinga write pointer set to a memory address having an even number.

In addition, the memory composite circuit element 260M may utilizedifferent kinds of control signaling. For example, tags may be utilizedfor block writes of variable length, such that a tag control bitindicates the last word to be written, which in turn may trigger otherdownstream processing in the data flow.

As may be apparent from the discussion above, the memory compositecircuit element 260M provides some highly new and novel functionality,including without limitation: a shared memory structure and controller(memory composite circuit element 260M) within a context-switchedreconfigurable array; providing multiple port types appropriate todifferent components within the reconfigurable array (apparatus 100,140); providing a bridge circuit between disparate parts of the array(apparatus 100, 140) such as configuration logic, application logic,data transfer logic, and system busses; acting as a destination orsource of data between processing tiles of the reconfigurable apparatus100, 140; providing access arbitration logic between the multiple porttypes and address arbitration between multiple instances of a specificport type; supporting a sequential context firing order on an executioncontext basis; supporting parallel memory access on an execution contextbasis; providing simultaneous access to memory across and within porttypes; address generators to generate addresses to the memory core;programmable logic supporting user defined memory boundaries that act aslimits on the range of generated addresses; modification of addresssources from within the reconfigurable array (apparatus 100, 140),including but not limited to, bounding; programmable and reconfigurableaddress generators 495; logic and user defined configuration datadescribing data block types which specify modifications to the generatedaddress pattern; methods of restarting the address pattern based uponthe data block type and context configuration; address generators 495being used as the address source for message transfer logic within thereconfigurable array; and support for control only trigger inputs gatingaccesses to the memory core.

Several other features of the memory composite circuit element 260M arealso new and novel, including the capability to program the addressgenerators 495 to read or write data in virtually any order, such asascending, descending, striping, 2-D, FIFO mode, wrapping andnon-wrapping patterns. In addition, the address generators 495 may alsobe pre-programmed to read and write data into the cluster memory (RAM)475 as a data stream in the reconfigurable fabric, and also to utilizeany user-specified or fixed location in the cluster memory (RAM) 475.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating in greater detail an exemplarymessage manager circuit 265 in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention. A message manager 265 provides communicationfunctionality described above and, in addition, can also function as asource and mechanism for on-chip configuration and re-configuration,without outside intervention.

The exemplary embodiments provide circuit elements, in the form of amessage manager 265, implementing communication circuitry which is ableto deliver configuration data and initialization data to cause areconfigurable IC (apparatus 100, 140) to perform useful functions. Assuch communication circuitry, the message manager 265 may additionallyprovide control data, deliver or receive application data and/or provideinstruction data for a processor such as sequential processing element(SPE) 292 or state machine element 290. The message manager 265 may beused to read back data (configuration, control, instruction orapplication) stored in the reconfigurable IC (apparatus 100, 140).

The message or data packets which are received or generated by themessage manager 265 may be directed by an absolute address to a finaldestination or by an absolute address to an intermediate destination anda “logical” address which causes local address generation circuitry tocompute the final destination for the received data.

The message manager 265 may be used to support any or all of thefollowing functionality in a reconfigurable IC (apparatus 100, 140):configuration of some or all of the device (apparatus 100, 140);movement of configuration and reconfiguration data on and off the IC;movement of application data on and off the IC; movement ofapplication/IC state data (possibly for debug or binding purposes) onand off the IC; system level control (master) of data movement; local onIC instruction processor to non-local on IC instruction processor;movement of configuration and reconfiguration from point-to-pointinternal to the IC; movement of application data from point-to-pointinternal to the IC; movement of application, and/or IC state data(possibly for debug or binding purposes) from point-to-point internal tothe IC; movement of configuration and reconfiguration datapoint-to-point internal to the IC; management of communication betweensequential processing elements (SPE) 292; data movement between clusters200.

In exemplary embodiments, a message manager 265 generally does thefollowing:

(1) A message manager 265 receives messages from and sends messages tothe supercluster way-point, which allows messages to come into and leavea cluster 200. Once a message gets to a message repeater, it is routedto (or closer to) its destination cluster or off-chip.

(2) A message manager 265 provides masterless data movement, which sendsmessages to and receives messages from the memory composite circuitelement 260M, allowing data-flow programs to transfer logical blocks ofmemory without involving the sequential processing element (SPE) 292.When data is moved across the apparatus 100, 140 using masterlessmessaging (MLM), generally a message manager 265 may be communicatingwith another message manager 265, but that is not required.

(3) Reads from and writes to the cluster memory (RAM) 475, as one of themechanisms for transferring data to or from cluster memory (RAM) 475.These transfers can happen before, during, or after data-flow programshave run. As a message manager 265 has the primary responsibility fordata movement on and off the device (apparatus 100, 140), in exemplaryembodiments, the message manager 265 automatically responds to Data Copyand Data Write messages. As a data movement master, the message manager265 monitors the status of its data buffers, it will not send dataunless it knows a receive buffer is empty, ready to receive the data,and it will not read data unless it knows a transmit buffer is full,ready to transmit the data. The message manager 265 supports single anddouble buffers without the need for polling buffer status. The automaticsending of “buffer status” messages to the destination greatly reducesthe amount of traffic. The “buffer status” messages are Data Writemessages which are sent when a buffer becomes available. Acknowledgemessages are often used to confirm the availability of data buffers inthe destination.

(4) Reads from and writes to cluster configurations via the CC bus 285.This is the primary mechanism for configuring the composite circuitelements 260, 260A, 260M and interconnect (155 and full interconnect275, 295) within a cluster 200-200D. The configuration data can also beread or copied to another cluster. The broadcast feature of the CC bus285 allows an entire task to be suspended, run, or freed within a singleclock cycle.

(5) Provides controls and monitoring, and may control or be controlledby the local sequential processing element (SPE) 292. The sequentialprocessing element (SPE) 292 can be programmed to respond to thecompletion of tasks by the message manager 265. These interrupts allowthe sequential processing element (SPE) 292 to perform other tasks whilethe message manager 265 is reading or writing its messages. The messagemanager 265 can start and stop the sequential processing element (SPE)292. When used as a master, the message manager 265 is tightly coupledwith the SPE 292. A program running in the SPE 292 can cause messages tobe sent via the message manager 265 to write and copy data buffers toand from any location in the apparatus 100, 140. The SPE 292 can beprogrammed to keep track of available buffers and the arrival of datathroughout the system so that it can allow old data to be overwrittenwhen it is no longer needed. The message manager 265 uses pollingmessages (Data Copy message type) and Acknowledge messages to keep theSPE 292 informed of the system status. Interrupts are generally used tomake the SPE 292 aware of the arrival of status information.

(6) Support “logical” destinations which are mapped to a physicaladdress. This provides flexible connections to the SPE 292 and memorycomposite circuit element 260M contexts in block and FIFO modes. SPE 292to SPE 292 communication is generally accomplished using “logical”destinations and interrupts, e.g., SPE 292 A can send a message to SPE292 B without having a specific buffer for the message, and SPE 292 Bwill have set up a buffer (including a maximum length) for messages tobe stored. When a message arrives in that buffer, an interrupt is sentto SPE 292 B which will then interpret the message and take appropriateaction.

The message manager 265 processes messages from three different origins:(1) Incoming messages from the message repeater (210) or through thefull interconnect 275, 295, and into the cluster's message manager 265;(2) Outgoing acknowledgments that are produced by a message manager 265when it has finished processing a message; and (3) Outgoing messagesfrom the cluster 200-200D, through the full interconnect 275, 295 orthrough the message repeater (210) to some destination, on or off chip.These messages may originate in the memory composite circuit element260M or the SPE 292.

In exemplary embodiments, generally there are about three types ofmessages processed by the message manager 265:

(1) A Data Write, a message whose payload will be written to some partof the Cluster's address space. A Data Write message generally consistsof the destination address and the data to be written there, which maybe application data, configuration data, or other data types. Data Writemessages, for example, may be user task writes, writes to cluster memory(RAM) 475, or writes over the configuration and control bus 285, such asfor writing to the SPE 292 and modifying SPE 292 executable code, orwrites to configure any composite circuit element 260, 260A, 260M withina cluster 200. In this embodiment, also for example, the message managercircuit 265 may write to the SPE 292, to provide SPE 292 control.

(2) A Data Copy, a message that causes the message manager 265 to readsome portion of its address space and produce a Data Write message thatis directed at some (possibly) other cluster. A Data Copy messagegenerally consists of a source address, destination address, and a sizeof data to be copied.

(3) Forward to External Way-Point, this message type is a compactwrapper for a message with a specific off-chip destination. The wrapperindicates which of the on-chip, top-level, way-points will direct therest of the message to a specific off-chip bus. The Data Write and DataCopy message types may send an acknowledgment message (a form of DataWrite message) when the operation has finished. Outgoing messages alsomay be assembled in the cluster memory (RAM) 475 by the SPE 292 and arethen transmitted by the message manager circuit 265, such as by settinga pointer to the start of the message and specifying the message size.The message assembly may be applicable to outgoing messages which do notrequire acknowledgment or extended to those which do requireacknowledgment. The format and protocol for these messages has beendescribed above with reference to FIG. 4.

Referring to FIG. 38, an exemplary message manager 265 comprises a usermessage controller 503, a masterless messaging (“MLM”) controller 507, amessage decoder 509 and a message generator 517 (both coupled to theinterconnect 220), a read controller 511, a write controller 513, acluster memory (RAM) 475 interface 519 (coupled to the cluster memory(RAM) 475 via busses 282, 283), and a CC bus arbitration circuit 521(coupled to the configuration and control (CC) bus 285). Not separatelyillustrated in FIG. 38, the message manager 265 may have its own addressgenerators in any of the various controllers or message generator 517.In an exemplary embodiment, the message manager circuit 265 may also beimplemented as dedicated logic gates, or as a finite state machine (oras a state machine) in conjunction with various combinational logicgates, or as any type of processor, for example and without limitation.

An incoming Data Write message will have been routed to the messagemanager 265 over interconnect 220, which is coupled to the messagedecoder 509. The message decoder 509 determines the message type and thedestination for the payload. The write controller 513 then providesappropriate addressing, such as providing an address in the clustermemory (RAM) 475 and passing the address and payload to the clustermemory interface 519, or providing a configuration address (for acomposite circuit element 260, 260A, 260M, cluster queue 245, or SPE292) and passing the address and payload to the CC bus arbitrationcircuit 521 for transmission on the CC bus 285 to its destinationcomposite circuit element 260, 260A, 260M, cluster queue 245, or SPE292. If an acknowledgment is required, message generator 517 prepares aData Write message and transmits it over the interconnect 220. Inaddition, a Data Write message with configuration information may beprovided to different locations in a memory map, configurationlocations, or initialization locations. Data Write messages also do nothave to have or be provided with sequential memory addresses, and theremay be non-contiguous locations for configurations. For example, onemessage may be utilized to write an array of contexts within a compositecircuit element 260, 260A, 260M or cluster queue 245.

An incoming Data Copy message also will have been routed to the messagemanager 265 over interconnect 220, which is coupled to the messagedecoder 509. The message decoder 509 determines the message type andwhether an acknowledgment is needed. The read controller 511 thenprovides appropriate addressing, such as providing an address in thecluster memory (RAM) 475 and passing the address to the cluster memoryinterface 519 to read the requested information, or providing aconfiguration address and passing the address to the to the CC busarbitration circuit 521 for transmission on the CC bus 285 to itsdestination composite circuit element 260, 260A, 260M, cluster queue245, or SPE 292 to obtain the requested information. Using the read orretrieved payload and destination address (provided in the Data Copymessage), the message generator 517 prepares a Data Write message andtransmits it over the interconnect 220, to the requester or a thirdparty. For example, this Data Copy message may be used to transfer aconfiguration from cluster X to cluster Y automatically, such as forresilience when part of a cluster may be broken, or to move a task outof an over-used cluster to a less crowded cluster, for example andwithout limitation. An acknowledgment message may be utilized toindicate to the host that a configuration has been accepted, and may begenerated automatically by the message generator 517.

User messages may be sent to the message manager 265 with a specificlocal address for storage of the payload. User messages also may be sentto the message manager 265 without a specific address, allowing thedestination user message controller 503 to determine where the messagepayload should go. For example, such a payload may then be stored in adefault address in the cluster memory (RAM) 475, and the SPE 292 isnotified that such a message was received. The SPE 292 may have beenprogrammed or configured that user messages are stored in that location,and may retrieve and process the message accordingly. This may beuseful, for example, for distributing a configuration to one or moreplaces, when the source of the message does not need to know where orwhich parts of the cluster have been configured.

Messages may also be generated by a cluster 200-200D, either by the SPE292 or using masterless messaging. The SPE 292 can build a message inthe cluster memory (RAM) 475, e.g., having configuration, control, orapplication data, and trigger the sending of the message by the messagemanager 265 (through the message generator 517, such as a Data Write orData Copy message). This allows a message to be sourced from the messagemanager 265 by the SPE 292 and not by some other host. Hugely important,this allows configuration and reconfiguration to be initiated andcontrolled internally by a processor (SPE 292) within the device(apparatus 100, 140), so configurations do not have to be downloadedinto the device from some external source.

Messages may also be generated by a cluster 200-200D using masterlessmessaging which does not require any involvement of the SPE 292, andwhich may have the added benefit of transferring blocks of data topotentially alleviate any back pressure in the full interconnect 275,295 data path. For example, interim results of data processing may needfurther processing in another cluster, and the interim data (such asfrom a composite circuit element 260, 260A) can be transferred through acluster queue 245 to another cluster, or may be transferred to thememory composite circuit element 260M for storage in the cluster memory(RAM) 475 and to trigger masterless messaging using the masterlessmessaging controller 507. The incoming data for the masterless messageis stored in cluster memory (RAM) 475 by the memory composite circuitelement 260M, such as by using a specific address generator 495, whichincrements a corresponding pointer as the data comes in and is stored.When either the specific address generator 495 indicates that a bufferor memory block is full, or when a buffer available bit (on bus 429) hasbeen set by the destination, the masterless messaging controller 507will direct or perform the message addressing and assemble the messagehaving a payload of the stored data (through message generator 517) andhave it transmitted on the interconnect 220 (also by the messagegenerator 517). Such masterless messaging may be utilized with FIFO,single buffer block and double buffer block modes of the memorycomposite circuit element 260M.

For example, single buffer block masterless messaging (MLM) may be doneusing a source address generator 495 in block mode, and by the sourcemessage manager 265 sending a type of Data Write Message to adestination address generator 495 in a block mode, e.g., a MEMU AdGenData Write (or Copy). The basic operation of single block buffering isthat data is collected from the full interconnect 275, 295 data path byan address generator 495. This address generator 495 fills a block incluster memory (RAM) 475 (and reaches a done state) and the messagemanager 265, using a different address generator 495, transfers the dataout of the cluster memory (RAM) 475 and creates messages with this dataas a payload to another cluster 200-200D. The message manager 265 thenrestarts the collection address generator 495 to collect more data. Twoaddress generators 495 are generally used at both the source anddestination. At the source, a data collection address generator 495 isused to collect the data in the data path and store it in the clustermemory (RAM) 475, and its block done control bit is used to trigger themessage manager 265. (For a double block mode, the message manager 265will reset the collecting address generator 495, to begin collectingdata again). The second address generator 495, the source transferaddress generator 495, is used to read the data from cluster memory(RAM) 475 when sending the data buffer messages. The source messagemanager 265 should determine that there is an empty buffer at thedestination and an available buffer at the source. This is done byhaving the status of the source and destination block done bitsavailable to the source message manager 265. The collection addressgenerator 495 should be assigned to a transfer address generator 495 ofthe memory composite circuit element 260M. The transfer addressgenerator 495 should be assigned to one of the MLM buffers in thecluster, if any are specified for the MLM process. The registersassociated with the selected MLM buffer determine the size anddestination of the message which transfers the data. At the destinationcluster, the transferred data can be stored in the destination clustermemory (RAM) 475, then read out and sent along the full interconnect275, 295 data path for use by composite circuit elements 260, 260A orcluster queues 245 in that destination cluster.

The message manager 265 also provides a broadcast mode, such as for anincoming message that may specify multiple destinations, e.g., to set upinput queues 320 with the same configuration, or to turn on or off aspecific task across multiple composite circuit elements 260, 260A orcluster queues 245 at the same time.

Exemplary configurable, computational elements 270 are illustrated inFIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a block diagram of an exemplarymultiplier-type configurable element 270 _(F), and FIG. 10 is a blockdiagram of an exemplary triple-ALU-type configurable element 270 _(G).As illustrated, each has four 16-bit inputs 365 and two 16-bit outputs375, and depending upon the context, each is capable of utilizing allinputs 365 and outputs 375. The configuration corresponding to aselected context is provided for mode selection of correspondingmultiplexers, demultiplexers, and other switching elements to implementthe selected configuration.

As illustrated in FIG. 9, the exemplary multiplier-type configurableelement 270 _(F) is configurable for several operating modes, such asfor 32-bit multiplication, 16-bit multiplication, accumulation, andmixtures of 16- and 32-bit arithmetic. As a brief, high-levelexplanation, the multiplier-type configurable element 270 _(F) may beconfigured using the 4 multiplexers 383, 384, 385, 386, using the 32-bitoutput select 387, and using other configuration bits input into theadder/subtractor 382 and the multiplier 381. The 32-bit output select387 specifies whether the low 32 bits of the adder/subtractor 382 isoutput or which portion which portion of the 64-bit accumulationregister 388 is output. The multiplexer 385 (A Select) specifies theA-input into the adder/subtractor 382, as zero, I₁, I₂, or theaccumulation register 388; the multiplexer 386 (B Select) specifies thealignment of the B-input into the adder/subtractor 382, as one of four16-bit portions of a 64-bit output from the multiplier 381; andconfiguration bits into the adder/subtractor 382 further specify whetherthe A-input is signed or unsigned and whether the B-input is added orsubtracted. The multiplexer 383 (P Select) specifies the P-input intothe multiplier 381, as I₃ or I₂, and whether signed or unsigned. Themultiplexer 384 (Q Select) specifies the Q-input into the multiplier381, as I₁ or I₀, and whether signed or unsigned. In addition, themultiplier-type configurable element 270 _(F) also illustrates outputfeedback within the element 270, from the 64-bit accumulation register388 to multiplexer 385.

As illustrated in FIG. 10, the exemplary triple-ALU-type configurableelement 270 _(G) is configurable for a wide variety of functions inincluding multiplication, addition and subtraction (in signedarithmetic), masking, arithmetic averaging, and rounding, for example.In addition, the exemplary triple-ALU-type configurable element 270 _(G)may output a constant, pass one value (copying A or B to its output),perform logical functions (NOT, AND, OR, XOR), and may performconditional or unconditional data flow. As illustrated in FIG. 10,depending upon the configuration bits, each of the shifters 393, 394,and 395 shift their corresponding inputs left (positive) or right(negative) by the designated amounts. The ABS blocks 389, 399 eithercompute the absolute value of the input or pass the input, alsodepending on the configuration bits. The status multiplexer 396generates a status word using flag bits from each of the ALUs 390, 391and 392, which may be provided to the SPE 292 (or SME 290), in which oneflag bit designates a carry or comparison, a second flag bit indicatesthe result is the most significant bit, a third flag bit indicates theresult is a negative one (−1), and a fourth flag bit indicates theresult is zero. The condition-swap multiplexers 397 and 398 are utilizedto provide conditional execution on inputs I₃, I₂, and based on theresult, passing I₀ and/or I₁ to outputs 375, and further providing forswapping of inputs before being copied to outputs 375.

As mentioned above, in addition to these types of configurable elements270, other anticipated configurable elements 270 include bit re-orderingelements (“BREOs”), single ALU elements, “super” ALU elements (32-bitALU), barrel shifter elements, look-up table elements, memory elements,programmable controller elements, communication elements, etc.

B. Program Compilation for the Apparatus

FIG. 11 is a flow diagram illustrating at an exemplary compilationprocess in accordance with the teachings of the present invention. Itshould be understood that the following discussion is very high levelfor purposes of explaining the present invention. The compilationprocess may be performed using any computer system or network,workstation, processing device, one or more microprocessors, electronicdesign automation (“EDA”) tools, electronic system-level (“ESL”) tools,etc.

Referring to FIG. 11, the method begins, start step 400, with selectionof an algorithm for compiling, step 405. Such an algorithm may beexpressed in a wide variety of ways, from a mathematical description toa source code or object code listing for a microprocessor, for example.The algorithm is converted or decomposed into a plurality of “tasks”,step 410, which are high level descriptions of a function or process,such as performing an inverse Fast Fourier Transformation (IFFT). A taskis then selected from the plurality of tasks and is assigned a taskidentifier (“task ID”), step 415, which is typically a sufficientlyunique identifier to differentiate the task from the other instances oftasks of the same algorithm or from tasks of other algorithms which willalso be running concurrently on the apparatus 100.

The selected task is then converted or decomposed into one or moreactions to be performed by a composite circuit element 260, 260A(including computational, state machine, and/or communication compositeelements 260, 290, 250) to execute the task, step 420. As mentionedabove, an “action” is the type of function or activity to be performedby a composite circuit element 260, 260A, such as multiplication, bitmanipulation, and instruction processing, for example, and may beconsidered equivalent to an instruction which would be executed by aprocessor or a function performed by an ASIC or FPGA to achieve the sameresult. For example, an IFFT task may be decomposed into a plurality of“butterfly” steps such as multiplication, addition and accumulationsteps, each or all of which would constitute an action (or instruction),such as “multiply ‘a’ times ‘b’ (a×b)”, and which would correspond toone of the operational configurations of one of the composite circuitelements 260. Accordingly, as used herein, the terms “action”,“function” or “activity” are used equivalently and interchangeably tomean any such circuit processes. (As a result, such actions (orinstructions), once assigned and bound, will be on the IC in the form ofa configuration of one or more of the elements 270). Of the one or moreactions (or instructions), an actions (or instructions) is selected andassigned an action identifier (“action ID”), step 425, which is asufficiently unique identifier to differentiate the action (orinstruction) from other actions (or instructions) for the selected task.The task ID and action ID are utilized in the run-time binding process,discussed below with reference to FIG. 14.

Each action (or instruction) is then mapped or assigned as one or morecontexts of one or more composite circuit elements 260, 260A by type ofcomposite circuit element(s) to be utilized, step 430, and not to anyspecific composite circuit elements 260, 260A or specific addresseswithin the architecture, to create a “symbolic”, generic or non-specificcompilation which is not tied to particular hardware components. Forexample, a multiplication and addition action (or instruction) may bemapped as a single context to an ALU-type composite element 260 (acomposite element 260 having an ALU-type circuit element 270), and notto a specific ALU-type composite element 260 within a specific cluster200. More complicated actions (or instructions) may be mapped tomultiple contexts of multiple types of composite circuit elements 260.Later, as part of the binding process, one or more specific compositecircuit elements 260, 260A of the selected type will be assigned toperform the action (or, equivalently, execute the instruction), as oneor more of its (or their) available contexts. This distinction isimportant, as it allows the action (or instruction) to be assignedinitially to one or more composite circuit elements 260, 260A and thenpotentially reassigned to other composite circuit elements 260, 260A, asmay be needed, during operation of the apparatus 100. In addition, asindicated, in exemplary embodiments, this separate binding process mayassign the action (or instruction) as one or more contexts which areavailable for the selected types of composite circuit elements 260,260A, with other contexts potentially remaining available for assignmentof other actions (or instructions).

As part of this process, corresponding “linkage” for each action (orinstruction) is also determined, also at this generic, symbolic ornon-specific level, step 435, namely, as generic or symbolic “pointers”:for each action, information is generated and retained concerning eithersources for input data or destinations for data output, or both. Forexample, action number “512” of task “418” will, in addition to beingmapped to an ALU-type composite element 260, 260A, have associatedinformation that it will receive its input from action number “414” oftask “229”, or that it will provide its output to action number “811” oftask “319” (or both). Only one such set of either input linkage oroutput linkage is required, provided the set of information is generatedconsistently for all actions (or instructions), as linking an input toits data source automatically is linking the output of the data sourceto this input (destination) which will utilize the data, and vice-versa.In selected embodiments, it may be useful to have both sets of I/Olinkage information. This relationship or “linkage” between input andoutput, through generic or symbolic pointers, is also useful as part ofthe task and action (or instruction) binding process discussed below.This input or output linkage determination of step 435 may be performedin the compilation process in a wide variety of orders and following anyof various steps. For example, this determination may be performedfollowing either step 440 or 445, such as when all actions (orinstructions) for a task have been determined and mapped to the types ofcomposite circuit elements 260, or when all actions (or instructions)and tasks have been determined and mapped to the types of compositecircuit elements 260, 260A.

The compilation process also determines any timing constraints in theprogram or algorithm which would correspondingly require a degree ofproximity or locality of execution by the various composite circuitelements 260, 260A, and provides corresponding regional constraints forthe affected tasks and/or actions (or instructions), step 440. Forexample, for various timing requirements, some processes may need to beexecuted within a single cluster 200 or zone 201 or within a group ofclusters 200 within the same supercluster 185, to avoid any delays whichmay be incurred from routing data messages or packets on theinterconnect 155 to and from other clusters 200 or other superclusters185. In these circumstances, a regional requirement is provided in thecompiled output (the “symbolic netlist” discussed below), such as by a“region” command or instruction designation, for example, to providethat the actions (or instructions) which follow must be performed withina single cluster 200 or within a single supercluster 185, followed by an“end region” indication for the actions (or instructions) confined tothe single cluster 200 or single supercluster 185. Depending upon theselected embodiment, such regional constraints may also be extended tozones 201 within a circuit cluster 200, such as a circuit cluster 200C.

Following step 440, the method determines whether there are additionalactions (or instructions) to be assigned an identifier and mapped totypes of composite circuit elements 260, step 445, and if so, the methodreturns to step 425 and iterates, to select the next action (orinstruction) and proceed through steps 425, 430 (potentially 435) and440. When all actions (or instructions) for the task have been assignedan identifier and mapped to types of composite circuit elements 260,260A (and possibly input or output linked) in step 440, the methodproceeds to step 450, and determines whether additional tasks are to becompiled. When additional tasks are to be compiled in step 450, themethod returns to step 415 and iterates, selecting the next task,assigning a task ID, and so on.

When all tasks have been processed in step 450, such that the selectedalgorithm has been converted into a plurality of tasks and actions (orinstructions), which have then been symbolically (generically ornon-specifically) mapped to types of composite circuit elements 260 andsymbolically linked by either data input sources or data outputdestinations (or both) (e.g., using symbolic pointers), the methodgenerates a composite circuit element and routing “symbolic netlist” orsymbolic compilation, step 455. This symbolic netlist, listing orcompilation comprises a plurality of symbolic netlist elements, witheach such symbolic netlist element corresponding to and containinginformation for execution of each action of each task of the algorithmor program. More particularly, each symbolic netlist element containsinformation concerning: (1) the task ID; (2) the action ID; (3) one ormore types of composite circuit elements 260 and the number of contextsneeded for each type of composite circuit element 260 for execution ofthe action (or instruction) of the corresponding task ID and action ID;(4) input or output (or both) linkage information; and (5) any regional(i.e., proximity) constraints for the corresponding tasks or actions (orinstructions). In addition, the compilation method is applicable to anyof the various circuit and interconnect topologies described herein,including to the supercluster 185C and circuit cluster 200C topologies.

As an alternative to mapping to one or more types of composite circuitelements 260, 260A in step 430 and linking instructions in step 435,actions (or instructions) may also be mapped to “macro-definitions” or“libraries”. Such “macro-definitions” or “libraries” are essentiallypre-compiled tasks or actions, which have already been mapped to typesof composite circuit elements 260, 260A and which have beencorrespondingly linked (with regional constraints, if any), with acorresponding symbolic netlist. For example, an IFFT may be mapped to anIFFT library, which contains all of the composite element-type andcomposite element-linkage information to carry out an IFFT using theapparatus 100. Such library creation may occur at any of various levels,such as mapping various algorithms of H.264 for streaming media, forexample.

Moreover, there may be multiple sets of such mappings and linkages forany selected action or task, which may be optimized for different goals,each of which may result in a different symbolic netlist. For example,as mentioned above, a task to be performed by a triple-ALU-typecomposite element 260, 260A may instead be mapped to three singleALU-type composite elements 260, 260A. While this could potentiallydecrease bandwidth or speed of performance, it may allow performance bythe apparatus 100 when other, higher priority algorithms are utilizingall available contexts of all available triple-ALU-type compositeelements 260, 260A. Similarly, a task to be performed by an ALU-typecomposite element 260, 260A may instead be mapped to a plurality ofaddition- and multiplication-type composite elements 260, 260A, creatingyet another mapping and linking variation.

As a result of these mapping and linking variations which are available,any selected algorithm may have multiple symbolic netlists generated,each optimized or selected for a different goal, such as speed ofperformance, power minimization, ability to run with diminishedresources, safety, redundancy, conflict resolution, and so on. Forexample, referring to FIG. 1, in the event a significant portion of theIC is damaged, such that the optimal algorithm for ABS no longer hassufficient IC resources to run, another (sub-optimal) version of the ABSfunctionality may be loaded and bound in the IC, enabling an importantfunction to continue to operate and avoid potentially harmfulconsequences under circumstances in which another IC, such as a standardmicroprocessor, would fail completely.

Following symbolic netlist generation in step 450, the compilationmethod determines whether additional algorithms are to be compiled or,as discussed above, additional versions or alternatives for a selectedalgorithm are to be compiled, step 455, and if so, the method returns tostep 405 and iterates. When no further algorithms or versions ofalgorithms are to be compiled in step 455, the method may end, returnstep 460.

C. Task Loading and Task Management

The exemplary embodiments include a wide variety of means to start andstop a distributed, multi-tasking, data-driven architecture. For realprograms, this is, of course very important. On a multi-tasking machine,it is important that starting and stopping a single task not interferewith any other task that is running or being loaded into thearchitecture. Starting a data-flow task consists of two separate steps.The first is to load the task into the apparatus 100, 140. The secondstep is to set the task to the “run” state. Sections D and E below arefocused on run-time binding, configuration and reconfiguration while theapparatus 100, 140 may be running. In this section, task loading andbinding is described for loading and binding in advance of run-time.

In exemplary embodiments, there are several ways for loading tasks. Onemechanism is to load the configuration information for a task via themessage manager 265, such as through messages downloaded from the fabricI/O from outside the IC or from another cluster, which the messagemanager 265 may then store in cluster memory (RAM) 475, or process andtransfer the configuration information over the CC bus 285 into theconfiguration and control registers 330, 330A of the composite circuitelements 260, 260A. Another method is for the message manager 265 toretrieve configuration information from cluster memory (RAM) 475, orprocess and/or transfer the configuration information over the CC bus285 into the configuration and control registers 330, 330A of thecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A. A third method is to have acluster's SPE 292 write the configuration into the configurationaddresses within the cluster 200-200D, discussed below in Sections D andE. A fourth method is to store some or all of the configurationinformation in non-volatile storage in each composite circuit element260, 260A, which may then be loaded into the configuration and controlregisters 330, 330A as necessary or desirable. Such configurationinformation is transferred over the CC bus 285 as a series of packets,illustrated in FIG. 36.

When the message manager 265 is used to load a task, the task'sconfiguration information is typically stored as a sequence of blocks,sorted by configuration address, in the cluster memory (RAM) 475. Eachblock contains a number of header words that describe the block. Eachblock contains, at least, the starting address for where the payload forthe block will be stored in the device. The payload for the blockcontains the contents for consecutive locations in the configurationaddress space for the programmable composite circuit elements 260, 260A.When the configuration information for composite circuit element 260,260A contains several equal-sized blocks at parallel addresses, then atwo-dimensional addressing block can be used to reduce the number ofheaders required to configure those programmable elements. If n parallelblocks are being programmed, instead of sending n blocks ofconfiguration information, only one two-dimensional block need be sent,thus reducing the size of the required headers by a factor of n.

For example and without limitation, a message manager 265 can receiveconfiguration information from off-chip, from another apparatus 100,140, or from a processor, such as the SPE 292. A message manager 265 canalso receive configuration information from any other cluster 200-200D.Thus other clusters 200-200D can forward or originate configurationinformation for any task, part of a task, or memory that is configuredor used within an apparatus 100, 140.

A SPE 292 can directly configure any of the composite circuit elements260, 260A in that cluster 200-200D. The SPE 292 does this by accessingthe desired configuration addresses that are part of the address spaceof the SPE 292. This allows the SPE 292 to copy a data-flow task intothe desired configuration addresses. The SP can also modify a task'sconfiguration information before storing the configuration informationin the composite circuit elements 260, 260A. This is useful forrelocating a task from the original location to another location, suchas when the original location has become unavailable, for whateverreason.

A SPE 292 also can configure any configurable composite circuit elements260, 260A in any other cluster on its own device or on any otherconnected device, whether on the same circuit board, rack of boards,computer, array of computers, or network-connected devices. This mode ofconfiguration is performed when the SPE 292 composes a messagecontaining configuration information and then uses the cluster's messagemanager 265 to transmit the message to the destination or to anintermediate destination that can forward the message to, or on the wayto, its final destination.

A third way for loading a task is to have some or all of theconfiguration memory (configuration and control registers 330, 330A)that is local to each programmable composite circuit element 260, 260Abe non-volatile memory. When all of the local configuration memory isnon-volatile, then the configuration is always available, even afterpower has been lost and restored to the device. Context-switching canstill proceed as for a device that contains only static memoryresources. When some of the local configuration memory is non-volatile,then dedicated tasks can always be resident, leaving some contexts freefor dynamically-loaded tasks.

As mentioned above, a program is decomposed into tasks, withconfiguration information for every context of all programmablecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A that are part of that task. A taskmay use all, some, or none of the contexts of each individual elements270 on the device. Generally, contexts that are not used by a first taskmay be used by other tasks, unless the co-resident tasks wouldcompromise the first task's bandwidth requirements. As mentioned above,every context contains a task identifier (task ID) indicating to whichtask that context belongs. Every context contains a mechanism thatspecifies the “run state” for that context, described in greater detailbelow. A context may be in one of the following states: “free”,“suspended”, “run”, or “single-step”. In the “free” state, the contexthas not been assigned to any task, so its input queues 320 are notactive and the context may not be run. In the “suspended” state, wherethe context has been allocated to a task, in an exemplary embodiment,each input queue 320 is actively listening to the data source to whichit is subscribed, but the context will not run until its state has beenchanged to run, while in other embodiments, the input queues 320 are notactive. The “run” state specifies that each input queue 320 is activelylistening to its data source and that the context may be run when therun pre-conditions have been met. In the “single-step” state, the inputsqueues 320 are active and the context may be run once and then remaininactive until the SPE 292, element controller 325, or message manager265 re-enables execution. Other valid context run-states are possibleand are discussed in greater detail below with reference to FIG. 16.

When a task's configuration information is loaded into a device,constituent context information for that task may be programmed to be inthe “suspended” state. In this state, for some embodiments, the inputqueues 320 of the composite circuit element 260, 260A may be listeningto their respective data sources. This means that the input queues 320will collect tokens that are meant for them, and if an input queue 320fills, it will issue back pressure (deny) to the data source, which willthen re-try the transmission. In this way, no data tokens are lost.

Either the message manager 265 or SPE 292 may change the run state for asingle context or for all the contexts in a task. The change of runstate happens in one clock period, such as through broadcast of amessage on the CC bus 285. When a single context of a programmableelement is switched to the run state, it will be eligible for executionif its other run conditions have been met. If all the contexts assignedto a task are switched to the run state simultaneously, then allcontexts whose other conditions are met will be candidates for executionon the next clock cycle.

The run-state for each context or for all the contexts in a task may beset to any of the valid run state values. In the next clock period, thatcontext, or all the contexts of the specified task, will be in that runstate.

Another way for starting a task is data-driven. After one or morecontexts in a task have been set to the run state, they will not rununtil the other requisite conditions are met. These conditions includehaving all the requisite tokens (input data) in the appropriate inputqueues 320, and room for data in significant output queues 315. A taskmay be set up to deliver those input tokens when desired conditions aredetected by that task or by the SPE 292. Inputs to the context may ormay not, depending on the configuration, be used in a calculation. Whensuch inputs exist, the data values that are not part of the calculationare considered to be “triggers” for a calculation. That is, when the“unused” inputs are “significant” for a calculation to proceed, even ifthe data value for that token is not part of the calculation, thecontext must wait for a token on the significant, unused, input. Thus, atask may be triggered by such significant, unused inputs. When an inputqueue 320 is shared across multiple contexts, the data in that queue isavailable to all those contexts without preference for any of thosecontexts. The execution of one of those contexts may be predicated uponreceiving a trigger input on that context and on no other, as determinedby the logic of the task. The logic of the task would then trigger thedesired context, which would consume a token from the shared queue andmake it unavailable to the other, undesired, contexts.

Several of the for starting a task are describe above. The determinationof when to start a task is made by the programmer, and may be startedimmediately after the task has been loaded. A task may also be startedby the SPE 292.

A task is halted, and thus its contexts freed, when the task's contextsare set to the “free” state. Every context that was part of that taskwill then be available for use by other tasks. The means for determiningwhen a task is to be halted/freed is left up to the programmer. Themeans for detecting a terminating condition is thus programmable. Thelogic of a task may determine when the task is done. The condition maybe expressed as either a status interrupt or a programmable compositecircuit element 260, 260A encountering a desired value or condition.This status value can be set up as an interrupt to the SPE 292. The SP,upon receiving the status interrupt, can set the run-state for the taskto the halted/free state.

Alternatively, the SPE 292 can be programmed to wait for the arrival ofa token on any of its input queues or for a specific value or sequenceof values. Upon receipt of the desired value(s), the SPE 292 can set therun-state for the task to the halt/free/suspend state.

A task is suspended, and thus none of its contexts will run, when thetask's contexts are set to the “suspend” state. In some exemplaryembodiments, the input queues 320 that were part of that task will stilllisten to their data sources, and issue back pressure when full, thuspreventing data loss. As with the setting the halt or free states, theSPE 292 can be used to suspend a task upon receiving a status or datainterrupt.

The programmable composite circuit elements 260, 260A have been designedso that a portion of a task may be loaded or changed while other tasksor other parts of that task remain running. The portion of the task thatis to be changed should be suspended, and optionally all data sourcesthat transmit to the suspended contexts, depending upon whether datare-routing is to occur. A specialized instruction in the SPE 292 canlocate the configuration addresses of such sources. Once the datasources are suspended and any existing tokens allowed to flow throughthe previously-configured programmable composite circuit elements 260,260A, the desired portion of the task is then suspended or freed, asnecessary, either on a context-by-context basis or by designating thecollection of desired contexts as a task (hereafter referred to as a“sub-task”) in its own right and with its own task identifier. A newsub-task can then be loaded, or may have been pre-loaded, or thenewly-freed contexts can be re-configured to perform the new operations.Then each of its input queues 315 are set to subscribe to the desireddata sources that may have been individually suspended above. Anydestinations that were subscribing to the old sub-task must, if the newsub-task's output ports are in a different location from where they werein the old sub-task, be reconfigured to listen to the new sub-tasksnewly-located output ports. The new sub-task is now configured to takethe place of the old sub-task, so the original data sources can be setto the run state. The sub-task can be set to the run state after itsdata destinations are subscribing to it and after the sub-task islistening to its data sources.

D. Operating System

FIG. 12 is a flow diagram illustrating at a high level an exemplaryoperating system or process in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention. It should be understood that the following discussionis very high level for purposes of explaining the present invention. Inaddition to being performed by the various SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290),alternatively, this operating system functionality could be performed byone or more additional controllers 175.

The process begins, starting with step 500, with the apparatus 100 beingpowered on, such as part of an SOC or within another system, such as avehicle, a computer, a complex system, a mobile telephone, a personaldigital assistant, an MP3 player, and so on. A self-test is performed,step 505, typically by each of the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290), which maytest themselves and, in exemplary embodiments, the various compositecircuit elements 260, 260A, first communication elements 250, fullinterconnect(s) 275 or distributed full interconnects 295, other SPEs292 (or SMEs 290), and other logic, communication or memory elementswithin their corresponding clusters 200 or other clusters 200 (e.g., forthose clusters 200 implemented without corresponding SPEs 292 (or SMEs290)). There are a wide variety of methods to determine whether thesevarious components are operating properly. In an exemplary embodiment,the operational determination is performed by a composite circuitelement (with composite circuit element utilized in its inclusive sense,including of all of the various composite circuit elements 260, 260A,first communication elements 250, full interconnect(s) 275 ordistributed full interconnects 295, other SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290), andother logic, communication or memory elements within their correspondingclusters 200 or other clusters 200), and is at least one of thefollowing types of determinations: a periodic diagnostic performed by atleast one composite circuit element of the plurality of compositecircuit elements; a background diagnostic performed as a selectedcontext of at least one composite circuit element of the plurality ofcomposite circuit elements; or a comparison test performed by aplurality of composite circuit elements of the same circuit elementtype. For example, each of the various types of composite circuitelements, including the types of elements 270, may each perform adiagnostic self-test, followed by comparing their corresponding results.If the results of a first composite circuit elements does not match theexpected result, such as by comparison of the results of other compositecircuit elements 260, 260A of the same type, the first composite circuitelement is deemed defective or not properly operational, and is notincluded within the map or list of available resources (step 515,below).

One or more of the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) (or controllers 175) will thenobtain and execute a boot program, step 510, such as a program designedand stored for the apparatus 100 in an associated memory (e.g., flash orother EEPROM memory) or other data storage device, such as a hard diskdrive, an optical drive, etc., which may be part of the same IC orassociated system.

Two significant functions are performed as part of the boot process ofthe operating system in steps 515 and 520. One or more of the SPEs 292(or SMEs 290) creates a map or list of available apparatus 100resources, such as a list within a cluster 200 or supercluster 185 ofwhich composite circuit elements 260, 260A, first communication elements250, and other components are functioning properly, step 515 (e.g.,similar to creating a bad or good sector map for a memory or diskdrive). Step 515 may be performed, for example, by each SPE 292 (or SME290) for its corresponding cluster 200, or by one or more SPEs 292 (orSMEs 290) (pre-designated or as determined in the boot program) for anentire supercluster 185 or matrix 150. In an exemplary embodiment, step515 is performed by combinational logic elements, as illustrated in andas discussed below with reference to FIG. 13, which may be located ordistributed within a composite circuit element 260, 260A, a cluster 200,and throughout the matrix hierarchy. In addition, in step 520, a mastercontroller is determined, which may be one selected SPE 292 (or SME 290)or a plurality of SPEs 292 or SMEs 290 operating as a master controller,or may be one or more additional controllers 175 or other, off-chipcontrollers, processors, or state machines. In an exemplary embodiment,a master controller is determined as a SPE 292 (or SME 290) having thelowest address (at the time).

The operating system, through one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) (orcontrollers 175), potentially with user input, then determines orselects which programs, algorithms or functions are to be performed,step 525, such as selecting the ABS, traction control, video andnavigational programs previously discussed. Next, in step 530, theoperating system binds the symbolic netlist(s) of the selected programsto the available resources (determined in step 515), by assigning a taskand action(s) (or instruction(s)) to a selected composite circuitelement 260, 260A (as one or more contexts), by linking the inputs ofthe selected composite circuit element 260, 260A to the othercorresponding composite circuit elements 260, 260A which are its datasources, to provide its input data (which also correspondingly linksthese data source outputs to the inputs of the selected compositecircuit element 260, 260A as data destinations), and/or by linking theoutputs of the selected composite circuit element 260, 260A (as datasources) to the other corresponding composite circuit elements 260, 260Awhich are its data destinations, to utilize the data produced by theselected composite circuit elements 260, 260A (which alsocorrespondingly links the inputs of these data destinations to theoutputs of the selected composite circuit element 260, 260A (as a datasource)).

Once all tasks and actions (or instructions) are bound (assigned andlinked), the apparatus 100 commences execution or running of thecorresponding programs or operations, step 535, such as operating theABS and fraction control systems, playing a video for passengers, andproviding a real-time navigational display for the driver. The binding(assigning and linking) process is discussed in detail below withreference to FIG. 14. The control of the program (or operational)execution process in each composite circuit element 260, 260A isdiscussed in greater detail below with reference to FIG. 16.

The operating system may also determine that new or differentfunctionality is needed, step 540, such as when a user or operatorselects an additional program, or circumstances require a change infunctionality, such as through a sensor detecting a particularcondition. For example, in a vehicle environment, a sensor may detect achange in driving or road conditions, and adjust various programsaccordingly. When new or different functionality is needed in step 540,the method rebinds (re-assigns and re-links) the affected tasks andactions (or instructions), step 545, and the apparatus 100 continues tooperate with these various changes. The tasks and actions (orinstructions) may be moved to new locations, or existing or new tasksand actions (or instructions) may be loaded, assigned and bound. Theoperating system may also bind or re-bind an entire program orfunctionality de novo. This re-binding step 545 may also includeunbinding, that is, completely removing an assigned functionality, suchas by deleting its corresponding contexts from memory. Such unbindingmay occur, for example, when the apparatus 100 is already at capacity,and room must be created for the new or different functionality. Suchunbinding was illustrated in FIG. 1, when video functioning was removedas the apparatus 100 increasingly lost capacity through IC damage.

The apparatus 100, through one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) (orcontrollers 175) performing the operating system (or as part of abuilt-in self test (“BIST”)), periodically performs a limited or fullself-test, step 550, to detect any changes in availability of resources,step 555. For example, the self-test may reveal that a BREO-type circuitelement 270 is no longer functioning properly, and therefore should nolonger be available for use within the apparatus 100. When such damageor loss of functionality occurs in step 555, the operating system(through the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) or controllers 175) correspondinglymodifies the map or list of available resources, step 560, rebinds theaffected tasks and actions (or instructions) using the modified list ormap, step 565, and the apparatus 100 continues to operate with thesevarious changes.

When no such damage or loss of functionality has occurred in step 555,or following step 565, the method proceeds to step 570. In step 570, theapparatus 100 may continue operating, returning to step 535. In theevent that operations are to cease in step 570, such as by the userselecting to turn off the device having the apparatus 100, the apparatus100 may shut down or power off, return step 575.

Not separately illustrated in FIG. 12, in another exemplary embodiment,the plurality of composite circuit elements 260, 260A may be implementedor adapted to store periodically a then current state, such as a“snapshot” of its current operations. Subsequently, in response to adetected fault, the composite circuit elements 260, 260A are adapted toretrieve the stored state and recommence operation using the storedstate.

E. Symbolic Netlist Assignment and Run-Time Binding

With this background in mind, the run-time binding process may now beexplained. As indicated above, the inventive architecture in conjunctionwith the run-time binding of a symbolic netlist (or other programcompilation) enable the self-healing and resiliency of the apparatus100. More particularly, when any of the composite circuit elements 260,260A, SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290), first communication elements 250, fullinterconnect(s) 275 or distributed full interconnect(s) 295, othercluster 200 components, or routing or other communications elements(190, 210), either do not perform properly initially (as determined instep 515 during testing portions of the boot process) or during lateroperation (as determined during self-test or as determined by othercomponents, steps 550, 555), they are not placed on or are removed fromthe map or list of available resources, respectively. If not performingproperly initially, the affected component is never assigned anyfunctionality in step 530. If the affected component was originallyfunctioning and is no longer (step 555), it is removed from the list ormap of available resources, and its assigned functionality is moved orloaded to another available component and re-routed, separately or aspart of the rebinding of the corresponding tasks or instructions of step565. If it has been determined that the data has been corrupted, thecontrolling task is notified so that the appropriate action can betaken. This binding process is explained in detail below.

In addition to run-time binding, it should also be noted that the entirebinding process may take place off-chip, in advance of run time. Thevarious tasks may be allocated to the available hardware, and allrouting and interconnection determinations made, by the user or bysuitably designed software, for example and without limitation. Theresulting data may then be loaded into the apparatus 100, 140, using themessage based interconnect 220, for example, with the configuration andcontrol words routed to their appropriate destinations throughout theapparatus 100, 140.

It should be noted that with the hierarchical interconnect 155 of theexemplary embodiments, which handles data, configuration and control,the loading and routing of the configuration and control words may occurquite rapidly and in parallel as the interconnect 155 fans out to lowerlevels and into each cluster 200-200D, with very few “hops” involvedfrom the fabric I/O to the message manager 265 and then on to theconfiguration and control registers 330, 330 of the composite circuitelements 260, 260A, 260A and cluster queues 245 over the CC bus 285.This rapid and parallel configuration routing over a message-basedinterconnect is in sharp contrast to the comparatively slow serialrouting or row and column routing of other configurable devices, such asFPGAs.

1. Resource Availability

FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating exemplary combinational logiccircuitry 600 for context availability determination within an exemplaryapparatus 100 in accordance with the teachings of the present invention.Such circuitry 600 may be included within each composite circuit element260, 260A, such as within a circuit element 270, an element controller325, within a SPE 292 (or SME 290), or as separate combinational logic(not separately illustrated in FIG. 8). As mentioned above, the numberof available contexts for each type of composite circuit element 260,260A is determined for use in binding (or re-binding) a program oralgorithm for performance within the apparatus 100. Such determinationmay be made by one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290), controllers (or otherprocessors) 175, or as illustrated in FIG. 13, dedicated combinationallogic circuitry 600.

Referring to FIG. 13, as part of the information stored in the memory330 within each composite circuit element 260, 260A is a state bit and afirst condition bit, for each context. The state bit indicates whetherthe context has been assigned or allocated to an action (or instruction)or not, and is therefore free or available to be assigned (logic high orone), or is not free and available to be assigned (logic low or zero).Alternatively, the state may be determined by examining the memory 330to determine whether the action ID and task ID fields are zero ornon-zero for the selected context, indicating available (no assigned orallocated action ID and task ID) or unavailable (already assigned orallocated action ID and task ID), and then inverted to be utilized asthe state bit in FIG. 13. The first condition bit indicates whether thecomposite circuit element 260, 260A is operational (logic high or one)or non-operational (logic low or zero), as determined from the variousexemplary self-test processes discussed above. For each context (of “m”contexts), a first AND operation is performed on the corresponding statebit and first condition bit, via AND gates 605 (illustrated as theplurality of AND gates 605 ₀, 605 ₁, through 605 _((m−1)), such that theresult of the AND operation indicates that the context is both availableand that the composite circuit element 260, 260A is working properly(logic high or one), or that either the context is not available or thatthe composite circuit element 260, 260A is not working properly (logiclow or zero).

A second, controller (SPE 292 (or SME 290)) condition bit is utilized toindicate whether the SPE 292 (or SME 290) (within the cluster 200) isoperational (logic high or one) or non-operational (logic low or zero),also as determined from the various exemplary self-test processesdiscussed above, and may be stored in any of the various memories withinthe composite circuit element 260, 260A or cluster 200. A second ANDoperation is performed using this first AND result (state and firstcondition bit) and the second, controller condition bit (via theplurality of AND gates 610 ₀, 610 ₁, through 610 _((m−1))), such thatthe result of the second AND operation indicates that the context isboth available and that both the composite circuit element 260, 260A andSPE 292 (or SME 290) are working properly (logic high or one), or thatthe context is not available, that the composite circuit element 260,260A is not working properly, or that the SPE 292 (or SME 290) is notworking properly (logic low or zero). The first and second ANDoperations also may be performed as a single, combined AND operationhaving at least three inputs (state bit, first condition bit, and secondcondition bit). The results of the second AND operation for each contextmay be added, such as by using a “one-hot” adder 615 (or a SPE 292 (orSME 290) or other controller), providing the number of free contexts percomposite circuit element 260, 260A (with a working SPE 292 (or SME290)).

As illustrated, this process may continue up the matrix hierarchy, withthe number of free contexts per composite circuit element 260, 260Aadded together for each type of composite circuit element 260, 260Awithin a cluster 200, then added together for each type of compositecircuit element 260, 260A within a supercluster 185, then added togetherfor each type of composite circuit element 260, 260A within a matrix150, and then added together for each type of composite circuit element260, 260A within the apparatus 100. These additional ADD operations maybe performed using dedicated ADDERs (e.g., 620, 625, 630) or by usingcomposite circuit elements 260, 260A configured for ADD operations andunder the control of their corresponding SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290). As aresult, availability counts for each type of composite circuit element260, 260A may be determined and maintained at each level, namely, at acluster 200 level, a supercluster 185 level, a matrix 150 level, and anapparatus level.

Such counts at these various levels are particularly useful fordetermining whether a supercluster 185 or cluster 200 has availabilityto satisfy a regional constraint, such as when a number of operationsmust be performed with timing constraints using certain types ofcomposite circuit elements 260, 260A within a cluster 200 orsupercluster 185. In addition, using such combinational logic circuitry,composite circuit element 260, 260A availability is determined andmaintained rapidly, concurrently and in parallel for all clusters 200,with delays only from several AND and ADD operations (e.g., two ANDdelays and four ADD delays total for an entire matrix 150).

As an alternative for availability determination, the SPE 292 (or SME290) may be utilized to poll or examine the various registers of all ofthe memories 330 of the corresponding composite circuit elements 260,260A within the cluster 200, and add up the results by type of compositecircuit element 260, 260A for each cluster, with one or more selectedSPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) then adding up results for each supercluster 185and matrix 150. Such availability determination may be top-down in thematrix hierarchy, such as initiated by a master controller (which may bea designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or a controller 175), or bottom-up inthe matrix hierarchy, such as illustrated in FIG. 13 or as provided byeach of the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) within each cluster 200. It will beapparent to those of skill in the electronic arts that there areinnumerable ways of providing this availability determination, usingcombinational, conditional or control logic, all of which are consideredequivalent and within the scope of the present invention.

2. Symbolic Netlist Assignment

FIG. 14, divided into FIGS. 14A, 14B, 14C and 14D, is a flow diagramillustrating an exemplary algorithm or symbolic netlist run-time bindingprocess in accordance with the teachings of the present invention, andfurther illustrates significant functionality associated with the SPEs292 (or SMEs 290) distributed throughout the apparatus 100.Alternatively, this functionality could be performed by one or moreadditional controllers 175, such as a controller 175 designated as amaster controller for the apparatus 100. In addition to the bindingprocess illustrated, those of skill in the art will recognize thatnumerous variations of the methodology are available, and are consideredequivalent and within the scope of the present invention. At least onesuch variation is also discussed below.

As mentioned above, the apparatus 100 performs a run-time bindingoperation of an algorithm provided as a symbolic netlist, which may beconsidered similar to a place and route operation for programmableresources with programmable routing. In this case, the programmableresources themselves have been placed on the IC, and the binding processthen assigns an action (or instruction) (as part of a task) to one ormore contexts of one or more available resources, and provides thecorresponding routing or linkage of inputs and outputs. In contrast withprior art place and route methodologies, which may take hours or days torun, the methodology of the invention operates quite rapidly, on thescale of microseconds or milliseconds to seconds.

Referring to FIG. 14A (FIG. 14A), the method begins, start step 700,with the determination and/or maintenance of the availability counts foreach type of composite circuit element 260, 260A, preferably at thecluster, supercluster, and matrix levels, as discussed above. The first(or next) action (i.e., function or instruction), as symbolic netlistelements, are provided to a master controller, step 705, which may beone or more designated SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) or one or more controllers175, for example. The designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175then determines whether the action (function or instruction) includes aregional or proximity constraint, step 710, and if so, proceeds to step715. When the action (or instruction) does not include a regionalconstraint in step 710, the action (or instruction) is provided to asupercluster and a cluster level having sufficient availability ofresources for the instruction, step 750, such as a sufficient number ofavailable contexts for the one or more types of composite circuitelements 260, 260A provided in the symbolic netlist.

The SME(s) 290 of the available cluster(s) 200 assign(s) the action (orinstruction) to one or more available composite circuit elements 260,260A in the cluster(s) 200, step 755, by storing the correspondinginformation (configuration, the task ID, the action ID, and the source(or destination) task ID and action ID) in the corresponding memory 330of each such composite circuit element 260, 260A, or stored in a memorycomposite circuit element 260, 260A, the second memory element 255, orother memory accessible to the SPE 292 (or SME 290) and the compositecircuit element 260, 260A. The amount and location of the storedinformation may vary among selected embodiments. In an exemplaryembodiment, the action (or instruction) is stored locally in the memory330 (or otherwise within the cluster 200) as a configuration, task ID,action ID, with corresponding linkage information (either data sourcefor inputs or data destination for outputs, also by task ID and actionID). Following the assignment, the availability count is modified, step760, such as automatically modified as described above for FIG. 13, orby decrementing a count maintained in a register when, for example, thevarious counts are maintained by a designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) orcontroller 175.

The method then determines whether all actions (or instructions) havebeen assigned, step 765. When there are actions (or instructions)remaining to be assigned, the method then determines whether there areavailable resources remaining, step 770. When there are availableresources remaining in step 770, the method returns to step 705 anditerates, selecting and assigning the next action (or instruction). Whenthere are no more actions (or instructions) remaining for assignment,the method proceeds to step 800 to commence with routing (i.e., linking)all of the assigned actions (or instructions).

When there are actions (or instructions) remaining to be assigned instep 765, but there are no more available resources in step 770,indicating that the selected algorithm may not be able to operate on theapparatus 100 as currently configured (or available), an error orexception message is generated, step 775, and the method may end, returnstep 780, as the symbolic netlist of the selected program cannot becurrently assigned. In that event, there are many potential courses ofaction. For example, the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller175 may delete lower priority programs or operations which are consumingor utilizing resources, to make room for the selected program oroperations and allow the selected program to execute on the apparatus100. In other instances, the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) orcontroller 175 may select another version of the program which may beable to be assigned without removing such other programs. In otherinstances, it may indicate that a larger apparatus 100 with moreresources is needed for the selected application.

When the selected action (or instruction) includes a regional constraintin step 710, the method proceeds to step 715, as illustrated in FIG.14B. Such a regional constraint may take the form of, for example:

region 3 supercluster region 1 cluster actions I1, I2 I1 I2 end regionregion 2 cluster actions I3, I4 I3 I4 end region end regionin which a supercluster regional (proximity) constraint incorporates twocluster-level regional constraints, each of which has included actions(or instructions) subject to the constraint (“constrained actions”). Asmentioned above, zone 201 constraints may also be utilized. Asillustrated in this example, actions (or instructions) I1 and I2 (assymbolic netlist elements) must be assigned within the same cluster 200,and actions (or instructions) I3 and I4 (as symbolic netlist elements)must be assigned within the same cluster 200 (as Region 2, which may bethe same or a different cluster than the Region 1 cluster of I1 and I2).Both clusters 200, however, must be in the same supercluster, asincorporated within the supercluster constraint (region 3).

In step 715, the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175determines whether the constraint is a supercluster constraint, whichwould require the set of constrained actions to be assigned within thesame supercluster 185. When the regional constraint is for asupercluster in step 715, the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) orcontroller 175 provides the supercluster constraint to all availablesuperclusters 185 which meet the availability requirements of theconstraint, and temporarily designates or marks those one or moresuperclusters as candidates, step 720. Following step 720, or when theconstraint is not a supercluster constraint in step 715, the constrainedactions are provided to all available clusters 200 which meet the firstcluster constraint (within one or more superclusters, if required by theprevious constraint), such as the various clusters which meet the Region1 constraint of the example, and those clusters 200 are temporarilydesignated as candidates, step 725. The next set of cluster-levelconstrained actions, if any, are provided to all available clusters 200which meet the next cluster constraint (within one or moresuperclusters, if required by the previous constraint), such as thevarious clusters which meet the Region 2 constraint of the example, andthose clusters 200 are also temporarily designated as candidates, step730. In addition, those superclusters or clusters which had previouslybeen candidates, but now do not contain sufficient available clusters tomeet these additional constraints, may now be released and no longerdesignated as candidates for the regional constraints. While notseparately illustrated, the same methodology may also be employed forany zone 201 constraints. When there are additional constraints to beprocessed, step 735, the method returns to step 730, and continues thetemporary designation process.

When no further constraints need to be processed in step 735, the methoddetermines whether one or more matches (supercluster and/or clusterlevels) have been found, step 740. When one or more matches have beenfound in step 740, the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175selects at least one such match, assigns the constrained actions (orinstructions) to the selected candidate set, releases all the othertentative assignments, and proceeds to step 760, to modify theavailability counts and continue the assignment process, as discussedabove. When no match has been found in step 740, indicating that theselected algorithm may not be able to operate on the apparatus 100 ascurrently configured (or available), the method returns to step 775 andgenerates an error or exception message, and the method may end, returnstep 780, as the symbolic netlist of the selected program with theconstraints cannot be currently assigned. As mentioned above, in thatevent, there are many potential courses of action. For example, thedesignated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 may delete lowerpriority programs or operations or may utilize another version of theprogram which may be assigned more readily.

3. Run-Time Binding

When all actions (or instructions) have been assigned in step 765, theactions (or instructions) may be connected or routed, to establish allof the data communication paths which will be utilized during operationof the apparatus 100 to execute the selected program or algorithm. Asindicated above, each action (or instruction) has input or outputinformation stored symbolically with the configuration for the selectedcontext of a selected composite circuit element 260, 260A. Morespecifically, the input or output information is stored effectively aspointers, with one task ID and action ID pointing to another task ID andaction ID as either its data source (for input data) or data destination(to provide output data). Such information is stored symbolically orgenerically, because until the action (or instruction) has beenassigned, the actual address for the data source or data destination isunknown. Provided that either data source information is utilizedconsistently, or data destination information is utilized consistently,only one such set of information is needed, although both can beutilized to potentially increase resiliency. In accordance with theexemplary embodiments, such data source or data destination informationis utilized to connect the data inputs (for the input queues 320) of acomposite circuit element 260, 260A, for each context, with the dataoutputs 375 (via output queues 315) of a context of another compositecircuit element 260, 260A (or the same composite circuit element 260,260A, for a feedback configuration). This creates either direct dataconnections (circuit-switched within a cluster 200) or message orpacket-routed (hybrid message or packet-routed and circuit switchedbetween clusters) data connections for data flow and, in either case,data is provided without requiring intermediate or separate steps ofdata storage in a register and data fetching from a register. Dependingon the selected embodiment, such as for a supercluster 185C and circuitcluster 200C, the data connections may all be circuit-switched, throughthe cluster queues 245 and corresponding full or distributedinterconnect 275, 295.

Following step 765, the routing process begins, step 800, as illustratedin FIG. 14C. In the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 14C, theprocess is “bottom-up”, beginning at the cluster 200 level (or zone 201and cluster 200C levels) and proceeding to higher levels (superclusterand matrix levels) as needed. Not separately illustrated, the processmay also be initiated from a “top-down” perspective, such as by thedesignated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 transmitting a requestto the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) of the clusters 200 to initiate therouting process of step 800.

Referring to FIG. 14C, step 800, one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) ofthe corresponding clusters 200 begin the routing process by selecting anaction (or instruction) of a first context of a composite circuitelement 260, 260A, and determining the source (or destination) task andaction identifiers stored as part of the selected action (orinstruction). In exemplary embodiments, this process may be performed byeach SPE 292 (or SME 290) of each cluster 200 as a parallel process,resulting in a very highly efficient binding routing process. In otherexemplary embodiments, if not every cluster 200 has a SPE 292 (or SME290), then another SPE 292 (or SME 290) within the supercluster 185 maybe utilized.

As indicated above, these source (or destination) task and action IDs,in selected embodiments, are stored in the memory 330 of the elementinterface and control 280 of the composite circuit element 260, 260A. Inalternative embodiments, the source (or destination) task and actionidentifiers may be stored in other memory elements, such as amemory-type composite circuit element 260 _(M), second memory element255, or other memory elements which may be included within a cluster200. To facilitate routing, the memory 330 (or other memory element) maybe implemented as a content addressable memory (“CAM”), as mentionedabove, or as any other type of memory. Consequently, in step 805, forrouting at a first level of hierarchy, a SPE 292 (or SME 290) mayexamine all of the memories (330, 255, 260 _(M), etc.) within itscluster 200 by these source (or destination) task and action identifiersof the first context (the composite circuit element 260, 260A context tobe routed) to find the corresponding action (or instruction) of another,second context which matches these source (or destination) task andaction identifiers. When other forms of memory are utilized instead of aCAM, e.g., SDRAM, then the SPE 292 (or SME 290) may perform a search ofthe memory (330, 255, 260 _(M), or other memory storing the task ID andaction ID), such as a binary search, to find the corresponding action(or instruction) of another, second context which matches these source(or destination) task and action identifiers.

When the matching action (or instruction) (having the corresponding taskand action identifiers) of a second context of a composite circuitelement 260, 260A has been found within a memory (330, 255, 260 _(M),etc.), in step 810, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) then knows to route theselected, first context to this second context having the matching orcorresponding action (or instruction). As a consequence, in step 815,when source task and action identifiers are stored, the SPE 292 (or SME290) routes the input(s) of the first context (as a data destination) tothe corresponding output of the second context (as a data source), andwhen destination task and action identifiers are stored, the SPE 292 (orSME 290) routes the output(s) of the first context (as a data source) tothe corresponding input(s) of the second context (as a datadestination). Within the cluster 200 or zone 201, the SPE 292 (or SME290) establishes these internal cluster connections via the fullinterconnect 275 or distributed full interconnect 295. Following step815, when there are additional actions (or instructions) to be routed instep 820, the method continues iteratively, returning to step 800, witha SPE 292 (or SME 290) or other controller selecting the next action (orinstruction) to be routed.

When the matching action (or instruction) (having the corresponding taskand action identifiers) of a second context of a composite circuitelement 260, 260A has not been found within a memory (330, 255, 260_(M), etc.) of its cluster 200, in step 810, the SPE 292 (or SME 290)then knows that the corresponding data source or destination is notwithin its cluster 200 (referred to as a first cluster 200). As aconsequence, in step 825, the SPE 292 (or SME 290) both: (1) routes theselected, first context to the periphery of the first cluster 200 (toone of the first communication elements 250 for data transmission viainterconnect 155, through the full interconnect 275, distributed fullinterconnect 295, or the message manager 265, or otherwise directly tothe first communication element 250); and (2) generates a routingrequest (query) to the supercluster-level controller (which may be adesignated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 having this assignedduty) to find a second context in another cluster 200 of itssupercluster 185 which may have the matching or corresponding action (orinstruction). From the perspective of the SPE 292 (or SME 290) of thefirst cluster 200, its routing of the first context is complete, and itmay proceed with routing of other contexts (actions (or instructions)),if any, returning to step 820, with the supercluster controller(designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175) then proceeding tostep 830.

Having received a routing request (designating the second context), instep 830, the supercluster controller transmits a request or query toall (other) clusters 200 within its supercluster 185, for those SPEs 292(or SMEs 290) to determine whether the corresponding action (orinstruction) is located in one of their memories (330, 255, 260 _(M),etc.), for routing at a second level of hierarchy. When one of theseother clusters 200, as a second cluster 200, has the matching orcorresponding action (or instruction) (i.e., has the source (ordestination) task and action identifiers of the first context) as asecond context of one of its composite circuit elements 260, 260A, step835, this second cluster 200 then knows that this second context is thesource or destination for data which is to be routed to or from another,first cluster 200. As a consequence, in step 840, the second SPE 292 (orSME 290) of the second cluster 200 routes this second context to theperiphery of the second cluster 200 (to one of the first communicationelements 250 for data transmission via interconnect 155, through thefull interconnect 275, distributed full interconnect 295, the messagemanager 265, or otherwise directly to the first communication element250), and transmits a corresponding message to the superclustercontroller (designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175),indicating or providing information that it has the second contexthaving the matching or corresponding action (or instruction). Thesupercluster controller, in turn, creates a corresponding linkagebetween the first cluster 200 and the second cluster 200, for thecorresponding contexts, step 845, such as by storing correspondingrouting information in a second communication element 210, and thecluster-to-cluster routing is complete. From the perspective of the SPE292 (or SME 290) of the second cluster 200, its routing is alsocomplete, and it may proceed with routing of its other contexts (actions(or instructions)), if any, also returning to step 820.

While not separately illustrated, in another variation, such as forsupercluster 185C, one or more of the SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) within thesupercluster 185C may perform all such routing within a cluster 200C orwithin the entire supercluster 185C, all through the various clusterqueues 245. Referring to FIG. 18, a SPE 292 (or SME 290) may provide:(1) corresponding routing within a selected zone 201B, such as directlyfrom CE₄ to CE₅, for example, via the full or distributed interconnect275, 295; (2) corresponding routing within a selected circuit cluster200C, such as directly from CE₄ to CE₁₂ via the full or distributedinterconnects 275, 295 and cluster queue 245 ₁₅; (3) correspondingrouting to a selected adjacent circuit cluster 200C, such as directlyfrom CE₄ to another composite circuit element 260, 260A of anothercluster 200C within the supercluster 185C via the full or distributedinterconnects 275, 295, any intervening (zone to zone) cluster queues245, and then through a peripheral cluster queue 245, such as 245 ₁₀;(4) corresponding routing to a selected, non-adjacent circuit cluster200C within the supercluster 185C, such as directly from CE₄ to anothercomposite circuit element 260, 260A of another cluster 200C via the fullor distributed interconnects 275, 295, any intervening (zone to zone)cluster queues 245, and typically a plurality of peripheral clusterqueues 245; and (5) corresponding routing to a circuit cluster 200Cwhich is not within the supercluster 185C, via a message manager 265.

For example, when routed through any of the cluster queues 245, anyselected cluster queue 245 (with a corresponding selected context) is adata destination for a selected context of data producing compositecircuit element 260, 260A, and is in turn a data source for either aselected context of a data consuming composite circuit element 260, 260Aor another selected context of a cluster queue 245 (such as for datarouting through a plurality of cluster queues 245, such as for datarouting between clusters 200C, for example, using either source- ordestination-based communication, as described herein).

In step 835, when none of these other clusters 200 within the selected,first supercluster 185 has the matching or corresponding action (orinstruction) (with the source (or destination) task and actionidentifiers of the first context) in a second context of one of itscomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, the supercluster controller thenknows that the corresponding data source or destination is not withinits supercluster 185 (referred to as a first supercluster 185). As aconsequence, in step 860 (illustrated in FIG. 14D), the firstsupercluster controller both: (1) routes the first context to theperiphery of the first supercluster 185 (i.e., to one of the secondcommunication elements 210 or to one of the message managers 265); and(2) generates a routing request to the matrix-level controller (whichalso may be a designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 havingthis assigned duty) to find a second context in another supercluster 185of its matrix 150 which may have the matching or corresponding action(or instruction), for routing at a third level of hierarchy. From theperspective of the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 ofthe first supercluster 185, its routing is complete, and the methodreturns to step 820, to continue the routing process for other actions,as may be needed, and also proceeds to step 865.

Having received a routing request (designating the second context), instep 865, the matrix controller transmits a request or query to all(other) clusters 200 within its matrix 150, for those SPEs 292 (or SMEs290) to determine whether the corresponding action (or instruction) islocated in one of their memories (330, 255, 260 _(M), etc.), for routingat this third level of hierarchy. This routing request may betransmitted directly to SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) of the clusters 200, ormay be transmitted via supercluster controllers. When one of these otherclusters 200, as a second cluster 200, has the matching or correspondingaction (or instruction) (i.e., has the source (or destination) task andaction identifiers of the first context) as a second context of one ofits composite circuit elements 260, 260A, step 870, this second cluster200 then knows that this second context is the source or destination fordata which is to be routed to or from another, first cluster 200. As aconsequence, in step 875, the second SPE 292 (or SME 290) of the secondcluster 200 routes this second context to the periphery of the secondcluster 200 (to one of the first communication elements 250 for datatransmission via interconnect 155, through the full interconnect 275,distributed full interconnect 295, the message manager 265, or otherwisedirectly to the first communication element 250), and transmits acorresponding message to the matrix controller (designated SPE 292 (orSME 290) or controller 175), indicating or providing information that ithas the second context having the matching or corresponding action (orinstruction). The matrix controller, in turn, creates a correspondinglinkage between the first cluster 200 and the second cluster 200, forthe corresponding contexts, step 880, such as by storing correspondingrouting information in a third communication element 190 and a secondcommunication element 210, and the supercluster-to-supercluster routingis complete. From the perspective of the SPE 292 (or SME 290) of thesecond cluster 200, its routing is also complete, and it may proceedwith routing of its other contexts (actions (or instructions)), if any,also returning to step 820.

In step 870, when none of these other clusters 200 within the selected,first matrix 150 has the matching or corresponding action (orinstruction) (with the source (or destination) task and actionidentifiers of the first context) in a second context of one of itscomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, the matrix controller then knowsthat the corresponding data source or destination is not within thefirst matrix 150. As a consequence, in step 885, the first matrix 150both: (1) routes the first context to the periphery of the first matrix150 (i.e., to one of the third communication elements 190); and (2)generates a routing request to the other matrix-level controllers (whichalso may be a designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 havingthis assigned duty) to find a second context in another matrix 150 ofthe device 100 which may have the matching or corresponding action (orinstruction), for routing at a fourth level of hierarchy. From theperspective of the designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 ofthe first matrix 150, its routing is complete, and the method returnsboth to step 820, to continue the routing process for other actions, asmay be needed, and the method iteratively repeats steps 865-880, asneeded, at the apparatus 100 level.

As all actions (or instructions) had been assigned previously, thematching or corresponding action (or instruction) is in a second contextof a composite circuit element 260, 260A in a cluster 200 of asupercluster 185 of one of the matrices 150, and the method searches upto the matrix or apparatus level, as needed, with those correspondingmatrix- or apparatus-level controllers (designated SPE 292 (or SME 290)or controller 175) routing to their corresponding peripheries (e.g.,third communication elements 190 and any intervening secondcommunication elements 210) using interconnect 155 and transmittingqueries to their corresponding lower-level superclusters 185 andclusters 200.

As a result, all actions (or instructions) become routed, connecting alldata sources or data destinations with their corresponding datadestinations or data sources, respectively, either within the samecluster 200 (step 815), or between clusters 200 (steps 825, 840, and845) which are within the same supercluster 185, or within the samematrix 150 (steps 875 and 880), or just within the apparatus 100. Whenall actions (or instructions) have been routed in step 820, thedesignated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175 sets or enables therun status for the particular task ID, step 850. When there areadditional tasks of a program or algorithm which have actions remainingto be routed, step 855, the method continues, returning to step 800, andwhen there are no further tasks having actions to be routed, the methodmay end, return step 780. It should also be noted that step 850, whichsets or enables the run status for the particular task, may also beperformed following step 855, when all of tasks have been routed.

The run status, as discussed below, is a field utilized in theconfiguration word for a context (stored in memory 330) and utilized bythe element controller 325 to determine whether the circuit element 270should execute a selected context (i.e., perform the correspondingaction). In this case, it indicates that the task has been fullyconfigured, with all actions (or instructions) assigned and routed, suchthat it may be ready to execute, provided that other conditions are alsomet, as discussed below. The run status may also be utilized to start orstop selected tasks, or to purge a selected task, such as to load a newtask in its place.

In addition, it will be apparent to those of skill in the electronicarts that a number of variations of the methodology of FIG. 14 may beimplemented equivalently and are within the scope of the presentinvention. For example, in the event that the actions (or instructions)are not stored locally in a memory 330, or in a memory composite element260 _(M), or in second memory element 255, but are stored centrally in aseparate memory, a top-down approach may be utilized. Continuing withthe example, a top-level controller such as a matrix-level controller(designated SPE 292 (or SME 290) or controller 175) may initiate therouting process, examining the stored and linked actions (orinstructions), determining the routing within and between the variousclusters, and passing the various configurations (as contexts) to theaffected composite circuit elements 260, 260A. As another variation, thetop-level controller such as a matrix-level controller (designated SPE292 (or SME 290) or controller 175) may simply transmit thecorresponding actions (or instructions) to the clusters 200, which theninitiate the routing process as described above with reference to FIGS.14C and 14D.

Also, while one or more controllers 175 may be utilized to implement theassignment and routing processes, it is also apparent that the use of adesignated SPE 292 (or SME 290) is a more robust and resilient solution.In these circumstances, any of the plurality of SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290)(of the corresponding plurality of clusters 200) may perform the variousroles of supercluster 185 controller, matrix 150 controller, orapparatus 100 controller. In the event of harm or damage to a given SPE292 (or SME 290), innumerable other SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) are availableto assume any of these roles.

Significantly, the time involved for this assignment and routing processis linear with respect to the number of actions (or instructions) “k”,and proceeds quite rapidly, as it is performed concurrently in amassively parallel process within each cluster 200. For example,depending upon the number of cluster-, supercluster- and matrix-levels“n” involved, the worst case amount of time per context (or instruction)is typically 3n+1 or 4n+1 clock or computation cycles, for messages tobe transmitted and routing to be completed to the correspondingperipheries of each level. This is in sharp contrast with prior artrouting methodologies in which the routing time, at a minimum, is afunction of k² and, if optimized, is non-deterministic and has anunpredictable routing time.

Another advantage of this assignment and binding process of the presentinvention is the ability to assign and route tasks and actions (orinstructions) to a plurality of heterogeneous clusters 200. Moreparticularly, clusters 200 are not required to be the same, and may bequite different, with different mixes of types of composite circuitelements 260, 260A, without impacting the ability to program theresulting device. For example, any cluster 200 with many multiplier-typecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A will simply have more availabilityfor assignment of multiplication operations, such that those types ofactions (or instructions) will automatically gravitate to those types ofclusters 200. In addition, the assignment and binding time would be thesame for both homogeneous or heterogeneous clusters 200.

As discussed above with reference to FIG. 1, in the event of damage toor failure of one or more components within a cluster 200, such as acomposite circuit element 260, 260A or SPE 292 (or SME 290), the cluster200 or the individual component may be designated or marked asunavailable. Under these circumstances, any tasks and/or actions (orinstructions) assigned to an affected composite circuit element 260,260A should be placed with one or more other composite circuit elements260, 260A, and this may be performed in a wide variety of ways.

FIG. 15 is a flow diagram illustrating a first exemplary re-assignmentand re-binding process in accordance with the teachings of the presentinvention. In this first approach, starting with step 900, such as dueto a failure indication during self-testing, one or more SPEs 292 (orSMEs 290) (from within the same cluster 200 if unaffected by the damageor failure, or from another cluster 200) marks or designates theaffected composite circuit element 260, 260A as unavailable, step 905,and directs the element controller 325 of the affected composite circuitelement 260, 260A to stop executing all contexts, step 910, typicallyutilizing the run status bit. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) would alsotransmit a message to the linked data source composite circuit elements260, 260A, to direct those composite circuit element(s) 260, 260A tostop producing data and transferring it to the affected compositecircuit element 260, 260A, step 915. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) thendetermines which (if any) other composite circuit elements 260, 260A areavailable to take over the affected functionality (i.e., thefunctionality which had been performed by the affected and nowunavailable composite circuit element 260, 260A), and copies thecontexts stored in the memory 330 of the affected composite circuitelement 260, 260A to one or more memories 330 of the available compositecircuit element(s) 260, 260A of the same type which have availablecontexts, step 920. In an exemplary embodiment, the SPE 292 (or SME 290)may store and maintain a transformation table, which indicates whichcomposite circuit elements 260, 260A have availability and have therequisite type of circuit element 270 for such a transfer offunctionality. The SPE 292 (or SME 290) may also copy the contents ofthe associated input queues 320 to the input queues 320 of the availablecomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, step 925; alternatively, forcertain types of real-time data, the input data may be discarded or,equivalently, allowed to remain in the associated input queues, withoperations resuming at the available composite circuit element(s) 260,260A using newly produced data.

The SPE 292 (or SME 290) then re-routes the connections to and from theavailable composite circuit elements 260, 260A, step 930, such as bydoing source (or destination) task and action identifier searches asdiscussed above and, in addition, if both source and destination taskand action identifier information is not stored, performing a search forthe affected actions (or instructions) in other memories 330 of othercomposite circuit elements 260, 260A, to determine the correspondingdata destinations (or sources) to complete the routing. Other routingsteps as discussed above also may be utilized as needed (e.g., forrouting between clusters 200). In step 935, the SPE 292 (or SME 290)then resets the corresponding run status bits of the transferredcontexts, to re-enable the execution of the affected actions (orinstructions) by the available composite circuit element(s) 260, 260A,and the re-assignment and re-binding process may end, return step 940.

In a second approach, the task may be re-assigned and re-bound (e.g., asillustrated in FIGS. 12-14) and, given the affected components are nolonger available, no actions (or instructions) will be assigned to them.This approach also has the advantage of preserving any localityconstraints, as such constraints will be included within the taskactions (or instructions). In addition, as the duration of theassignment and binding process is linear with respect to the number ofactions (or instructions), this re-assignment and re-binding processproceeds rapidly, with minimal disruption, particularly when the numberof affected actions (or instructions) is comparatively small. As part ofthis process, one of the designated SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) may alsodirect the element controller 325 of the affected composite circuitelement 260, 260A to stop executing all contexts, transmit a message tothe linked data source composite circuit element(s) 260, 260A to directthe source composite circuit element(s) 260, 260A to stop producing dataand transferring it to the affected composite circuit element 260, 260A,copy the contents of the associated input queues 320 to the newlyassigned, available composite circuit elements 260, 260A, and reset therun status bits for the transferred contexts of the available compositecircuit elements 260, 260A.

As a consequence, a program or algorithm that has been compiled as asymbolic netlist for the apparatus 100 has been assigned and routedwithin the apparatus 100, creating all of the composite circuit element260, 260A configurations (stored as contexts) and data path connections(via full interconnect 275, distributed full interconnect 295, orinterconnect 155). While the apparatus 100 has been designed to enablesuch assignment and routing in real time, it is not required to beperformed in real-time and may be performed in advance, with all suchassignment and routing within the scope of the present invention. Withthis background, the operation of and control of execution within theapparatus 100 may now be explained.

F. Apparatus Operation and Control of Execution

FIG. 16, divided into FIGS. 16A, 16B, and 16C, is a diagram illustratingexemplary configuration and control words 1000, 1135, and 1002, inaccordance with the teachings of the present invention. As illustratedin FIG. 16A, the exemplary configuration word 1000 is comprised of aplurality of data fields, and comprises at least two or more of thefollowing data fields, in any order: an element configuration field1010; a task ID field 1015; an action ID field 1020; a source (and/ordestination) address field 1025 (designating a source (or destination)composite circuit element 260, 260A, a port, and context); an elementtype field 1030; a significant inputs (“SI”) field 1035; a significantoutputs (“SO”) field 1040; an optional cycles (“CY”) field 1045; a runstatus field 1050; an optional priority field 1055; an optional stateready field 1060; optional execution lead, next and last fields 1065,1067, 1069; an optional last context field 1070; an optional interruptsfield 1075; an optional single-step field 1080; an optional constantmode field 1085, an optional partial (or conditional) execution field1090, optional output queue lead, next and last fields 1091, 1092, 1093,an optional stay in context field 1094, and an optional “fork” field1096. A corresponding configuration and control word 1000 it utilizedfor each context of the composite circuit element 260, 260A. Asmentioned above, the memory composite circuit element 260M has somewhatdifferent control, so multiple contexts may execute simultaneously,rather than sequentially. It will be apparent to those of skill in theelectronic arts that additional or fewer fields may be utilized,depending upon the applications and objectives of the selected apparatus100 and any incorporated system, and all such variations are within thescope of the present invention.

A plurality of configuration words, one for each context, are utilizedby the element controller 325 to control the configuration and executionof a configurable element 270, and utilized by the input controller 336and output controller 338 to control the configuration and operation ofthe input queues 320 and output queues 315, respectively. Eachconfiguration word is indexed by the context number. The one or moreconfiguration bits which control how the configurable element 270 is tobe configured or how data is to be interpreted is or are stored inelement configuration field 1010. Similarly, the assigned and routed(bound) actions (or instructions) are stored as the corresponding taskID, in field 1015, and the action ID in field 1020.

The plurality of configuration and control words are stored in one ormore configuration and control registers 330, 330A, and also may bestored in any of the various memories (e.g., cluster RAM 475), such asfor use in configuration and reconfiguration of other composite circuitelements 260, 260A, and may be moved throughout the IC and on and offthe IC. In an exemplary embodiment, configuration and control words fora context are stored with contiguous addresses in the configuration andcontrol registers 330, 330A, with offsets between configurationaddresses of consecutive contexts (utilized for other configurationinformation).

The data output and/or data input locations, as bound destination(and/or source) addresses, are stored in field 1025. Alternatively, thedata input and/or data output pointers (as source/destination task IDsand action IDs) may be stored, depending upon the methodologyimplemented for potential re-routing. For example, when an entire taskis re-assigned and re-bound de novo, new routing information will begenerated, rather than utilizing the previously stored source anddestination information. The remaining control fields are utilized tocontrol whether and when a given context is executed (for acorresponding action to be performed by the circuit element 270), howinterrupts are serviced by the SPE 292 (or SME 290), and how output datais provided to one or more destination addresses.

The element type field 1030 is utilized to designate which type ofelement 270 is being used for the context, selecting one of the elements270 when more than one type of element 270 is included within acomposite circuit element 260A.

The element controller 325, in exemplary embodiments, comprisescombinational logic gates or elements, such as AND, OR and INVERTERgates, which provide a result (a given context executes or does notexecute), based upon the values of the bits stored in the various fields(e.g., 1035, 1040, 1050, 1060) of the exemplary configuration andcontrol word 1000. FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating exemplarycombinational logic circuitry 1100 for context readiness determinationwithin an exemplary apparatus in accordance with the teachings of thepresent invention.

As mentioned above, in a data flow environment, a context (task) mayexecute when it has sufficient input data and a sufficiently free oravailable destination for the resulting output data. As there aremultiple inputs and corresponding multiple input queues 320 into theconfigurable element 270, the significant input (SI) bits (1035)designate which of those inputs are to be utilized in the selectedcontext. In addition, the input queues 320 are adapted to provide afirst signal, referred to as “enough input” (“EI”), indicating thatthere is sufficient data in the corresponding input queues 320. Forexample, in the element controller 325, each of the SI bits areinverted, and each of the inverted SI bits and its corresponding EIsignal are ORed (OR gates 1110 ₀ through 1110 _(n)), with all of theircorresponding OR results (four results for four inputs) then ANDedtogether (AND gate 1115), to provide a “data input ready” signal, suchthat the AND result (data input ready) indicates that there issufficient data available at the inputs which will be utilized by theselected context. More specifically, the data input ready signal isprovided when (1) there is enough input data at the significant inputs,and (2) any other remaining input is not significant.

Similarly, as there are multiple output queues 315 and outputs 375 fromthe configurable element 270, the significant output (SO) bits (1040)designate which of those outputs and corresponding queues are to beutilized in the selected context. In addition, a second signal referredto as a “room for more” (“RFM”) signal is provided to indicate that thecorresponding destination(s) have sufficient space available for outputdata, either from the output queues 315 or from the input queues 320 ofthe data destination, or potentially from an output register trackingoutput data consumption. Also for example, in the element controller325, the SO bits are inverted, and each of the inverted SO bits and itscorresponding RFM signal are ORed (OR gates 1120 ₀ through 1120 _(n)),with all of their corresponding OR results (two results for two outputs)then ANDed together (AND gate 1125), to provide a “data output ready”signal, such that the AND result (data output ready) indicates thatthere is sufficient memory space available for data output by theselected context, namely, space available in the corresponding outputqueues 315 (or destination input queues 320 (or other memory)). Morespecifically, the data output ready signal is provided when (1) there isroom for output data at the significant outputs, and (2) any otherremaining output is not significant.

These two results, the data input ready and data output ready then maybe ANDed together (AND gate 1130), to provide an overall data “ready”status for a selected context. For example, the ready status is equal toa logic one when both the data input(s) and data output(s) are ready,and is zero otherwise. Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 17, thedata input ready and data output ready results may be ANDed with otherfields (state ready and run status, discussed below), to provide anoverall indication that the context is ready for execution (a “contextready” signal).

The run status stored in field 1050 indicates whether the context hasbeen enabled for execution, and may be set following data input-outputrouting in the binding process, or set (or reset) at other times by themessage manager 265 or SPE 292 (or SME 290), for example. For example,the task (of which the selected context is a part) may still be in theprocess of being configured and routed for other configurable elements270, and should not be enabled until such routing is complete.Accordingly, a task may be started by setting or enabling the contextrun status in field 1050. In other circumstances, one of the messagemanagers 265 or SPEs 292 (or SMEs 290) may have halted a task, forpossible resumption at another time, or may be in the process ofdeleting tasks, and may do so by clearing of disabling the context runstatus in field 1050. As a consequence, the element controller 325 willexecute a context only when enabled, as indicated by the run status infield 1050.

As indicated above, the run status (also referred to as run state) maybe implemented as a multi-bit field in various exemplary embodiments, toindicate at least several different statuses or states, in anycombination, such as run, halt, suspend, single-step, single-step withinterrupt, and free, for any selected context, for example and withoutlimitation. Also as mentioned above, these different states entaildifferent allowed capabilities of the composite circuit element 260,260A, 260M for the selected context. Also as indicated above, the runstatus may be determined by a message manager 265, a SPE 292 (or SME290), or by an incoming message on the message channel (220). It shouldalso be noted that starting (enabling) and stopping (disabling) a taskmay be accomplished through a broadcast message over the CC bus 285(from the message manager 265 or SPE 292), by matching the task ID, aspreviously mentioned.

In various exemplary embodiments, the run status may be implemented toindicate any number of different statuses or states, in any combination,such as run, halt, suspend, single-step, single-step with interrupt, andfree, for any selected context for example and without limitation. Asindicated above, halt indicates that the input queues 320 are notlistening to any sources, cannot issue back pressure, and the contextdoes not execute; suspend indicates that the input queues 320 arelistening to specified sources, are receiving data and can issue backpressure, but the context does not execute; run indicates that the inputqueues 320 are listening to specified sources, are receiving data, canissue back pressure, and the context does execute; single-step indicatesthat the input queues 320 are listening to specified sources, arereceiving data and can issue back pressure, but the context executesonly once and does not execute again until re-enabled; single-step withinterrupt indicates that the input queues 320 are listening to specifiedsources, are receiving data and can issue back pressure, but the contextexecutes only once, issues an interrupt to the SPE 292, and does notexecute again until re-enabled; and free indicates that the registerscan be reset when the apparatus 100, 140 starts, and would need a newconfiguration to execute an operation. It should be noted that the freeand halt statuses are different: for a halt status, the configuration(and control) word 1000 remains in place, and the status can bere-enabled (such as to run or single-step), while for a free status, theconfiguration and control registers 330, 330A would need to berepopulated with a configuration (and control) word 1000 for theselected context.

The SPE 292 (or SME 290) may also utilize one or more state ready bits(stored in optional field 1060) to control context execution based onvarious conditions or other events. For example, when a condition hasbeen met, such as an initialization, a selected context may need to berun next, and is designated with the state ready bits. All of these bits(run status, state ready, data output ready signal, data input readysignal) may be ANDed (AND gate 1130), and the result may also be storedwithin the run status field 1050 or another field accessible by theelement controller 325. As a consequence, the conjunction of the stateready bits, the data input ready, data output ready and run statusindicators, provide an indication to cause the element controller 325 toallow execution of the selected context. Alternatively, operations maybe controlled through use of the run status (of field 1050), without thestate ready bits, allowing the SPE 292 (or SME 290) to simply designatewhether the context is or is not enabled for execution.

In another exemplary embodiment, whether an element 270 may execute agiven context may be determined by other combinations of enablement,data readiness, conditions and execution ordering. In an exemplaryembodiment, an element 270 may execute a selected context when inputdata has arrived in the significant input queues 320 (data input readysignal), the significant output queues 315 have room to accept outputdata (data output ready signal), the run status is enabled (set to run),and execution chain signals from the corresponding execution chain bits(in fields 1065, 1067, 1069). Execution chaining is discussed in greaterdetail below and, in this case, the execution of a context by an element270 will also depend on whether the context is part of an executionchain and if so, where the context is in the chain sequence (lead, next,last).

The optional cycles field 1045 is utilized to designate the number ofclock cycles required to execute the corresponding action. This field isutilized to avoid another, second context being executed whilecomputations of a first context are still in progress.

The optional single-step field 1080 is utilized to provide for a contextto execute just once, such as for results to be examined by the SPE 292(or SME 290). Various testing contexts are often run in a single-stepmode, with the SPE 292 (or SME 290) setting or clearing a single-stepbit (e.g., for a test to be run at selected times, and to not be alwaysavailable to run).

In a selected embodiment, the optional context field 1070 may beutilized as part of arbitration among potential execution of a pluralityof contexts. When a context has been executed, the last context bit isset (and the last context bits of the other contexts are reset to zero).In the event of competing contexts which are ready for execution, thelast context bit is utilized to determine if one of the contexts justexecuted, and if so, allows the other context to execute, to avoid onecontext from completely dominating execution in the configurable element270. In addition, in the event of competing contexts which did not justexecute, one or more optional priority bits (stored in field 1055) maybe utilized to arbitrate and allow the higher priority context toexecute first.

In an exemplary embodiment, an optional partial (and/or conditional)execution indicator (stored in field 1090) is utilized to allowexecution when not all significant inputs have data present or, in someinstances, execution may begin without any inputs being designated assignificant or, in other instances, some inputs may be examined todetermine if other inputs will be utilized. In another exemplaryembodiment, the partial or conditional execution may be indicated orimplicit within the configuration bits themselves, as part of orimplicit within the op code or instruction utilized in or forming theconfiguration (or configuration bits), without use of a separate partialor conditional execution indicator in optional field 1090. Generally,the element controller 325 chooses a context to execute based on thearrival of data at the significant inputs and the availability of roomin the significant output queues. While this method works for most typesof operations, there are some operations where this may be an impedimentto providing useful results and another form of control is utilized,using the partial execution indicator or the configuration bits.

An exemplary situation in which a partial execution indicator is helpfulis the case where the operation copies one of two or more inputs to anoutput and does not use the otherwise significant inputs that were notchosen in a particular execution cycle. This is useful for a mergeoperation that selects data from one of its input streams and leaves theother streams alone until such time as another input stream will beprocessed. Only one datum from each of the processed streams isconsumed. The data in the unprocessed streams remains intact. If allinitially significant inputs were required to be present at all times,the operation could dead-lock (halt until reset because itsprerequisites cannot be met) under some circumstances. One suchcircumstance is when a first input data stream should be processed andits corresponding input queue 320 has data, but a second (initially)significant input queue 320 does not have data because it has alreadybeen completely processed, in which case no more data will be arrivingat that second input queue 320, and so cannot act as a trigger for thecurrent operation (i.e., the second input queue is conditionallysignificant—initially significant, and later insignificant). Anothercase is where the second data stream has not yet been created, and maynot be created until the first data stream has finished being processed.In this latter case, an artificial circular dependency is created, wherethe first data stream cannot be processed because the second data streamhas not yet been created and the second data stream cannot be createduntil the first data stream has finished being processed.

To accommodate these important processing requirements of having inputsthat may be present, but are not always required to be present or maynot be present altogether initially, the conditions precedent forexecution are modified for certain operations, so that the elementcontroller 325 may allow an element 270 to execute in the absence of oneor more otherwise significant inputs or to execute initially withoutregard to the status of inputs. This may be accomplished in any ofseveral ways. First, when such an operation is programmed in a contextof the configuration and control registers 330, 330A, the elementcontroller 325 recognizes the partial (or conditional) executionindicator (stored in field 1090), allowing a “partial execution” of thisclass of instructions/context, so that execution may proceed without thepresence of all significant inputs.

As a second alternative, one or more inputs or outputs that may actuallybe used for the operation are nonetheless marked as insignificant,meaning that those inputs or outputs are not required for the elementcontroller 325 to decide to run the operation. In this secondalternative, however, the onus falls on the operation to decide whetherany insignificant input actually needs to be present. If the neededinsignificant input were present, then the operation could proceed andrun to completion. If the needed insignificant input were not present,then the operation would be aborted and could be a candidate forexecution at some future time.

As a third alternative, the indication of a conditional or partialexecution is implicit in the element configuration. For example, somemultiply operations require input data on four input queues 320, but notall at the same time. Implicit in the multiplication instruction, duringa first cycle, the element 270 may begin execution without any inputsbeing considered significant, and examine several inputs for data, suchas I₀ and I₂. If data is not present at these inputs, the execution willabort but, concomitantly, the element 270 will designate these twoinputs as significant (e.g., will set a corresponding flag or set a bitin the optional field 1090), such that the operation will trigger whendata arrives at these inputs in a subsequent cycle. When data is presentat these inputs, the element 270 will execute, as a partial operation,storing the interim results in an accumulator within the element 270,and in the next (second) cycle, determine if data is present at all fourinputs, and if so, will execute (and if not, may abort and proceed withcalculations for another context, using the previously stored interimresults in a subsequent cycle, to resume the calculations where it leftoff). In a third cycle, the element will examine other inputs for data,such as I₁ and I₃, and if so, will execute, with the previouslysignificant inputs of I₀ and I₁ no longer being significant for thisexecution cycle. Accordingly, in this instance, selected inputs areconditionally and temporally significant, and while a context mayinitially commence an execution without being triggered by a dataarrival, it cannot complete the execution without the input data atthese significant inputs, such that a lack of input data at aconditionally or temporally significant data input can be utilized tohalt any further execution of the context.

In addition, some data operations are conditional, and may use thepartial (or conditional) execution indicator (stored in field 1090), ormay allow the element 270 to determine the inputs it needs duringexecution. This may occur in evaluation of a “case statement”, forexample, when the result of the case will cause selection of a branch toexecute with selected inputs, without waiting for other inputs which maynever arrive. This may also occur for a “for loop”, in which the body ofthe loop is controlled with variables, which in the first pass mayrequire waiting for data to arrive in significant input queues 320, andfor subsequent passes, will depend upon variables fed back to determinesignificant input queues 320 or output queues 315, if any. For example,an element 270 may actually only need data on selected input queues 320when some condition is true or false, such as the result of acomparison. The element 270 may utilize data from first and second inputqueues 320, and if that operation returns a result which is “true”, theelement 270 will utilize data from a third input queue 320, and if“false”, the element 270 will utilize data from a fourth input queue320. As another example, the element 270 may utilize data from first andsecond input queues 320, and if that operation returns a result which is“true”, the element 270 will utilize data from a third input queue 320,and if “false”, the element 270 will abort the operation, and will notconsume input data or provide output data. As another example, theelement 270 may execute an operation, and if that operation returns aresult which is “true”, the output controller 338 will output data froma first output queue 315, and if “false”, the output controller 338 willoutput data from a second output queue 315. As yet another example, theelement 270 may execute an operation, and if that operation returns aresult which is “true”, the element controller 325 will output data intoa first output queue 315, and if “false”, the element controller 325will output data into a second output queue 315 and ignore any existingdata in a first output queue 315 that could otherwise exert backpressure.

Other composite circuit elements 260, 260A may also use partial orconditional execution. For example, a composite circuit element 260,260A may read from a first input queue 320 until it is empty (therebybecoming a condition), and then read from a second input queue 320 in asubsequent operation, without needing to inject new data into the firstinput queue 320 in order to be able to read from the second input queue320. As another example, a composite circuit element 260, 260A may runan operation, and if that operation returns a result which is “true”,the element 270 will utilize data from a first input queue 320, and willwait for that data to arrive, temporarily setting that input queue 320into a significant status, and will not consume input data or provideoutput data in the interim; after the data has arrived and the operationhas continued, the status of the input queue 320 can be reset toinsignificant.

The order of execution of element contexts depends on the arrival ofdata in input queues 320 for each element context, and the availabilityof empty slots in the output queues 315. This order is, essentially,non-deterministic. The order of broadcasting data from each of theoutput contexts is, essentially, non-deterministic. For the majority ofcases, this is fine. There are some cases where the order that data isoutput from the different contexts is important. To handle these cases,contexts can be set up in a “chain”. In one embodiment, each chain has a“lead” context, a “next” context, and a “last” context (link or node).The lead is the first context in the chain, the last is the last contextin the chain. A chain with only one context is both a lead and a last. Awide variety of implementations are possible and within the scope of thedisclosure. In addition, such chaining or ordering of context executionsmay also override arbitration when additional contexts may also be readyfor execution. In general, such chaining or ordering may be establishedas part of the configuration established in defining specific tasks andloading the tasks into the apparatus 100, 140.

In an exemplary embodiment, the optional execution context leadindicator (stored in field 1065), execution context next indicator(stored in field 1067), and optional execution context last indicator(stored in field 1069) (also collectively referred to as “executionchain” indicators), are utilized to determine the first (lead) executioncontext and the next and last execution contexts to execute, and isparticularly useful for controlling the sequence in which contexts areexecuted, i.e., sequencing or chaining together a sequence ofoperations. In this embodiment, the element controller 325 can commenceexecution of the “execution chain lead” context (the first context ofthe chain, also as designated within field 1065), when the otherconditions discussed above have been met. More particularly, in anexemplary embodiment, when execution is to begin, the element controller325 looks for execution contexts that are ready to run, namely their“run” bit says that they are eligible to be run, that all theirsignificant inputs are ready, and their significant outputs have roomfor results. The contexts that are ready and are “leads” are eligible tobe chosen to be executed.

Thereafter, the element controller 325 will examine the executioncontext next field 1067 (or last field 1069) to see if the currentcontext is the last in the chain or points to another context in thechain, and will execute the next context in the sequence, as designatedin the field 1067, also when the other conditions (e.g., EI, RFM, etc.)have been met, and otherwise will wait (idle) for this next context tobecome available, such as when data arrives. If the next executioncontext is the same as the current context (without the utilization offield 1069 and may require comparison logic), or if otherwise thecurrent context has been designated in field 1069 as the last context ofthe chain (allowing examination of the stored value without the need fora comparison), then execution of the sequence has been completed. If theexecution context was the last in the chain, then the list of eligibleleads is examined for new chain candidates. These chain indicator fields1065, 1067 and 1069 may also include a designation as to whether thedata input(s) will be consumed.

In a selected embodiment, an optional “interrupts” field 1075 may alsobe provided. This field may designate, as part of the configuration word1000, the setting, masking, and detecting of interrupts, including whena context executes. These interrupts are serviced by the SPE 292 (or SME290).

Also in a selected embodiment, an optional constant mode field 1085 maybe utilized, to designate that one or more of the input data words inone or more input queues 320 is a constant or are constants. For such aconstant, it is generally maintained (until changed), so the constant isnot consumed during data operations. In an exemplary embodiment,selected bits of the constant mode field 1085 are also utilized toindicate the next data read location (e.g., which data word in a twoword input queue 320), such as for toggling or switching between two ormore constant values, and this may be extended to any or all of theinput queues 320. This can also be done as part of a tight loop, withoutput data fed back into the input queues 320, and may also be appliedto output queues 315.

In another exemplary embodiment, a composite circuit element 260, 260Amay need to continue to execute in a selected context until a particulardata stream is processed or a loop is completed. For this mode, anoptional “stay in context” field 1094 may be utilized. The compositecircuit element 260, 260A will continue to execute the selected context(provided there is incoming data in the significant inputs and room fordata in significant outputs) until the data stream includes a “tag”control bit indicating the end of a data block, at which point the nextcontext will re-initialize the loop or input queue(s) 320.

In another exemplary embodiment, when destination-based (rather thansource-based) data transmission is utilized, the optional “fork” field1096 is utilized for output replication, when the same output is to beprovided (or replicated) to multiple destinations. Additional contextsare utilized to store these additional destinations. In this embodiment,the element controller 325 can commence execution of the “fork lead”context (the first context of the fork, also as designated within field1030), when the other conditions discussed above have been met.Thereafter, when the one or more bits of the fork field 1096 indicateanother context, the current output will be provided (copiedsequentially) as the output for that context, avoiding a need tore-execute a context based on the same data to provide the same output,just to a different location. Other contexts which are not part of the“fork” sequence are not executed during this sequential outputreplication. If the next context is the same as the current context,then execution of the forking (output duplication) has been completed.When no fork is indicated in field 1030, the element controller 325simply determines what other contexts may be ready for execution, andproceeds accordingly.

Referring to FIG. 16B, a configuration (and control) word 1135 isillustrated for an input queue 320. Such a configuration (and control)word 1135 is typically provided to the composite circuit element 260,260A over the CC bus 285, and may be considered part of theconfiguration word 1000 for a selected context (with its task ID andaction ID fields). The configuration (and control) word 1135 is shownseparately in FIG. 16B for ease of explanation. As illustrated in FIG.16B, the exemplary configuration word 1135 is comprised of a pluralityof data fields, and comprises at least two or more of the following datafields, in any order: a source field 1139; a significant inputs (“SI”)field 1141; an optional constant mode field 1143; an optional statusfield 1145; an optional maximum length field 1147; an optional lengthfield 1149; and a reset field 1151. A corresponding input queueconfiguration and control word 1135 it utilized for each context of theinput queue 320. As mentioned above, the memory composite circuitelement 260M has somewhat different control, so multiple contexts mayexecute simultaneously, rather than sequentially. It will be apparent tothose of skill in the electronic arts that additional or fewer fieldsmay be utilized, depending upon the applications and objectives of theselected apparatus 100, 140 and any incorporated system, and all suchvariations are within the scope of the present invention.

The source field 1139 designates a source that the input queue 320 is tolisten to over the full interconnect 275, 295, indicating a compositecircuit element 260, 260A, 260M or cluster queue 245, the context of thecomposite circuit element 260, 260A, 260M or cluster queue 245, and aport).

The significant inputs (“SI”) field 1141 is utilized to indicate whetherthe input queue 320 is a significant input for the context (as forconditional modes, an input queue 320 may still be utilized for datawhile being considered insignificant, as discussed above). The optionalconstant mode field 1143 is utilized to indicate whether the input queuehas a constant length or not, such that the same data or sequence ofdata is re-read (the data is not consumed and stays in place forsuccessive operations until it is rewritten). The optional status field1145 is utilized to indicate the condition of the input queue 320, suchas whether it is broken or otherwise out of service. The optionalmaximum length field 1147 is utilized to force a maximum length of theinput queue 320 to be a length of two (default length), so that theinput queue 320 cannot be merged for use by other contexts. The optionallength field 1149 indicates whether the input queue 320 has been merged,with specification of the precise merger specified in a master register(not separately illustrated) utilized for additional control for all ofthe input queues 320 of the particular composite circuit element 260,260A or cluster queue 245. The reset field 1151 may be utilized to allowthe input queues 320 to be overwritten and effectively purged, such asfor a reset by the SPE 292.

Such a master register, in an exemplary embodiment, would indicate themerger of the input queue memory allocated to the eight availablecontexts, so that a selected context may have a larger (or smaller)portion of the input queue 320 resources. Such a master register is alsoutilized for storing read and write pointers, an indicator of whetherthe input queue 320 is full or not, and a mask for performance ofselected operations.

Referring to FIG. 16C, a configuration (and control) word 1160 isillustrated for an output queue 315. Such a configuration (and control)word 1160 is typically provided to the composite circuit element 260,260A over the CC bus 285, and may be considered part of theconfiguration word 1000 for a selected context (with its task ID andaction ID fields). The configuration (and control) word 1160 is shownseparately in FIG. 16C for ease of explanation. As illustrated in FIG.16C, the exemplary configuration word 1160 is comprised of a pluralityof data fields, and comprises at least two or more of the following datafields, in any order: an optional source field 1162; a significantoutputs (“SO”) field 1164; an optional output mapping field 1166; anoptional output queue chain lead field 1168; an optional output queuechain next field 1172; an optional output queue chain last field 1174;and a reset field 1176. A corresponding output queue configuration andcontrol word 1160 it utilized for each context of the output queue 315.As mentioned above, the memory composite circuit element 260M hassomewhat different control, so multiple contexts may executesimultaneously, rather than sequentially. It will be apparent to thoseof skill in the electronic arts that additional or fewer fields may beutilized, depending upon the applications and objectives of the selectedapparatus 100, 140 and any incorporated system, and all such variationsare within the scope of the present invention.

The optional source field 1162 designates the composite circuit element260, 260A, 260M or cluster queue 245, the context of the compositecircuit element 260, 260A, 260M or cluster queue 245, and an outputport. This optional field may be utilized by the output controller 338to provide this information over the full interconnect 275, 295,designating itself as a source to which a destination may attend.

The significant outputs (“SO”) field 1164 is utilized to indicatewhether the output queue 315 is a significant output for the context (asfor conditional modes, an output queue 320 may still be utilized fordata while being considered insignificant, as discussed above). Theoptional output queue mapping field 1166 is used to indicate whether theoutput of the context will be mapped to a different output queuecontext. The reset field 1176 may be utilized to allow the output queues315 to be overwritten, resetting the pointers and effectively purgingthe output queue 315, so that any data in the output queue 315 is notutilized, such as for a reset by the SPE 292 or for loading a newconfiguration.

In some embodiments, the order of broadcasting data from an output queue315 depends on which output queues 315 have data, whether the outputqueue 315 is in the middle of an acknowledgment handshake with itsdestinations, and whether back-pressure has slowed the broadcast ofdata. The order of broadcasting data from each of the output contextsis, essentially, non-deterministic. For the majority of cases, this isfine. There is a comparatively small number of cases where the orderthat data is output from the different output queues 315 is important.To handle these cases, output queue 315 contexts can be set up in a“chain” as well. In one embodiment, each output queue 315 chain also hasa “lead” context, a “next” context, and a “last” context. The lead isthe first output queue 315 context in the chain, the last is the lastoutput queue 315 context in the chain. An output queue 315 chain withonly one context is both a lead and a last. A wide variety ofimplementations are possible and within the scope of the disclosure.

In an exemplary embodiment, the optional output queue lead indicator(stored in field 1168), output queue next indicator (stored in field1172), and optional output queue last indicator (stored in field 1174)(also collectively referred to as “output queue chain” indicators), areutilized to determine the first (lead) context and the next and lastcontexts to execute, and is particularly useful for controlling thesequence of data broadcasting from output queues 315, i.e., sequencingor chaining together a sequence of output data. In this embodiment, whenoutput queue 315 broadcast begins, the output controller 338 looks foroutput queue contexts that have data. The output queue 315 contexts thathave data and are “leads” are eligible to be chosen to be broadcast (thefirst output queue 315 of the chain, also as designated within field1091). If the output queue 315 receives a deny signal, the lead contextof the output queue 315 will continue to broadcast data, until no denysignal is received.

Thereafter, the output controller 338 will examine the output queue nextfield 1172 (or last field 1174) to see if the current output queuecontext is the last in the chain or points to another output queuecontext in the chain, and will allow broadcast from the next outputqueue context in the sequence, as designated in the field 1172, alsowhen the other conditions (e.g., data is present in the output queue315, etc.) have been met, and otherwise will wait (idle) for this nextoutput queue context to become available, such as when data arrives. Ifthe next output queue context is the same as the current output queuecontext (without the utilization of field 1174 and may requirecomparison logic), or if otherwise the current output queue context hasbeen designated in field 1174 as the last output queue context of thechain (allowing examination of the stored value without the need for acomparison), then the data broadcast of the sequence has been completed.If the output queue 315 receives a deny signal, the next/last context ofthe output queue 315 will continue to broadcast data, until no denysignal is received. If the output queue context was the last in thechain, then the list of eligible leads is examined for new output queuechain candidates. These output queue chain indicator fields 1168, 1172and 1174 may also include a designation as to whether the data output(s)will be consumed.

As a consequence, as discussed above, each of the element controller325, input controller 336, and output controller 338 may be implementedusing a plurality of combinational logic gates, which evaluate thevarious fields of the corresponding configuration and control words1000, 1135, 1160 (and other control signals) for each context. When thevarious fields and other signal indicate that a context is both readyand should be run, the element controller 325, input controller 336 oroutput controller 338 may load a configuration of the context if needed,and the corresponding task or action (or instruction) is executed.

In summary, the present invention provides resilient and adaptiveintegrated circuitry with self-healing capabilities. Numerous advantagesof the exemplary embodiments are readily apparent. The IC architectureof the present invention is resilient, providing adaptation formanufacturing defects, flaws which may arise during usage of the IC, andadaptability for new features, services, algorithms, and other events.This IC architecture is self-healing, because in the event a portion ofthe IC is damaged or otherwise becomes unusable, another portion of theIC is effectively “recruited” or reassigned to take over and perform thefunctions of the damaged portion. The present invention allows a singlecomponent to be switched out, and does not have the fixed wiring of theprior art. In addition, as the functions are reassigned, new control anddata pathways are also created, so that the transferred operationscontinue to perform seamlessly with other IC operations. Such adaptiveresilience and self-healing may occur in real-time or near real-time,depending upon the selected embodiment. Such resiliency provides for agraceful degradation of performance in the event of damage to the IC,rather than a catastrophic failure, and is especially significant inhealth and safety applications.

It is to be understood that this application discloses a system,apparatus, software and method for resilient and adaptive integratedcircuitry with self-healing capabilities. Although the invention hasbeen described with respect to specific embodiments thereof, theseembodiments are merely illustrative and not restrictive of theinvention. In the description herein, numerous specific details areprovided, such as examples of electronic components, electronic andstructural connections, materials, and structural variations, to providea thorough understanding of embodiments of the present invention. Oneskilled in the relevant art will recognize, however, that an embodimentof the invention can be practiced without one or more of the specificdetails, or with other apparatus, systems, assemblies, components,materials, parts, etc. In other instances, well-known structures,materials, or operations are not specifically shown or described indetail to avoid obscuring aspects of embodiments of the presentinvention. In addition, the various Figures are not drawn to scale andshould not be regarded as limiting.

A “processor” as used herein may be any type of controller or processor,and may be embodied as one or more processors 175, adapted to performthe functionality discussed herein. The processor may be in a separatesystem, or may be integrated as part of the die of the systems 100, 140,etc., and may be any type of processor or controller, such as acommercially available processor or microprocessor, e.g., ARM orMicro-Blaze, or may be implemented using one or more SPEs 292 (or SMEs290). As the term processor is used herein, a processor may include useof a single integrated circuit (“IC”), or may include use of a pluralityof integrated circuits or other components connected, arranged orgrouped together, such as controllers, microprocessors, digital signalprocessors (“DSPs”), parallel processors, multiple core processors,custom ICs, application specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), fieldprogrammable gate arrays (“FPGAs”), adaptive computing ICs, associatedmemory (such as RAM, DRAM and ROM), and other ICs and components. As aconsequence, as used herein, the term processor should be understood toequivalently mean and include a single IC, or arrangement of custom ICs,ASICs, processors, microprocessors, controllers, FPGAs, adaptivecomputing ICs, or some other grouping of integrated circuits whichperform the functions discussed below, with associated memory, such asmicroprocessor memory or additional RAM, DRAM, SDRAM, SRAM, MRAM, ROM,FLASH, EPROM or E²PROM. A processor (such as processor 1215), with itsassociated memory, may be adapted or configured (via programming, FPGAinterconnection, or hard-wiring) to perform the methodologies of theinvention. For example, the methodology may be programmed and stored, ina processor/controller 175 with its associated memory (and/or othermemory) and other equivalent components, as a set of programinstructions or other code (or equivalent configuration or otherprogram) for subsequent execution when the processor is operative (i.e.,powered on and functioning). Equivalently, when the processor 1215 mayimplemented in whole or part as FPGAs, custom ICs and/or ASICs, theFPGAs, custom ICs or ASICs also may be designed, configured and/orhard-wired to implement the methodology of the invention. For example,the processor may be implemented as an arrangement of processors,controllers, microprocessors, DSPs and/or ASICs, collectively referredto as a “controller” or “processor”, which are respectively programmed,designed, adapted or configured to implement the methodology of theinvention, in conjunction with a memory.

“Memory”, as used herein, which may include a data repository (ordatabase), may be embodied in any number of forms, including within anycomputer or other machine-readable data storage medium, memory device orother storage or communication device for storage or communication ofinformation, currently known or which becomes available in the future,including, but not limited to, a memory integrated circuit (“IC”), ormemory portion of an integrated circuit (such as the resident memorywithin a processor), whether volatile or non-volatile, whether removableor non-removable, including without limitation RAM, FLASH, DRAM, SDRAM,SRAM, MRAM, FeRAM, ROM, EPROM or E²PROM, or any other form of memorydevice, such as a magnetic hard drive, an optical drive, a magnetic diskor tape drive, a hard disk drive, other machine-readable storage ormemory media such as a floppy disk, a CDROM, a CD-RW, digital versatiledisk (DVD) or other optical memory, or any other type of memory, storagemedium, or data storage apparatus or circuit, which is known or whichbecomes known, depending upon the selected embodiment. In addition, suchcomputer readable media includes any form of communication media whichembodies computer readable instructions, data structures, programmodules or other data in a data signal or modulated signal, such as anelectromagnetic or optical carrier wave or other transport mechanism,including any information delivery media, which may encode data or otherinformation in a signal, wired or wirelessly, including electromagnetic,optical, acoustic, RF or infrared signals, and so on. The memory may beadapted to store various look up tables, parameters, coefficients, otherinformation and data, programs or instructions (of the software of thepresent invention), and other types of tables such as database tables.

As indicated above, the processor/controller 175 is programmed, usingsoftware and data structures of the invention, for example, to performthe compilation methodology of the present invention. As a consequence,the system and method of the present invention may be embodied assoftware which provides such programming or other instructions, such asa set of instructions and/or metadata embodied within a computerreadable medium. In addition, metadata may also be utilized to definethe various data structures of a look up table or a database. Suchsoftware may be in the form of source or object code, by way of exampleand without limitation. Source code further may be compiled into someform of instructions or object code (including assembly languageinstructions or configuration information). The software, source code ormetadata of the present invention may be embodied as any type of code,such as C, C++, SystemC, LISA, XML, Java, Brew, SQL and its variations(e.g., SQL 99 or proprietary versions of SQL), DB2, Oracle, or any othertype of programming language which performs the functionality discussedherein, including various hardware definition or hardware modelinglanguages (e.g., Verilog, VHDL, RTL) and resulting database files (e.g.,GDSII). As a consequence, a “construct”, “program construct”, “softwareconstruct” or “software”, as used equivalently herein, means and refersto any programming language, of any kind, with any syntax or signatures,which provides or can be interpreted to provide the associatedfunctionality or methodology specified (when instantiated or loaded intoa processor or computer and executed, including the processor 1215, forexample).

The software, metadata, or other source code of the present inventionand any resulting bit file (object code, database, or look up table) maybe embodied within any tangible storage medium, such as any of thecomputer or other machine-readable data storage media, ascomputer-readable instructions, data structures, program modules orother data, such as discussed above with respect to the memory 1220,e.g., a floppy disk, a CDROM, a CD-RW, a DVD, a magnetic hard drive, anoptical drive, or any other type of data storage apparatus or medium, asmentioned above.

Any I/O interfaces may be implemented as known or may become known inthe art, and may include impedance matching capability, voltagetranslation for a low voltage processor to interface with a highervoltage control bus, and various switching mechanisms (e.g.,transistors) to turn various lines or connectors on or off in responseto signaling from the processor. In addition, the I/O interface may alsobe adapted to receive and/or transmit signals externally to the system,such as through hard-wiring, IR or RF signaling, for example, to receiveinformation such as algorithms for compiling, for example. The I/Ointerface may provide connection to any type of bus or network structureor medium, using any selected architecture. By way of example and notlimitation, such architectures include Industry Standard Architecture(ISA) bus, Enhanced ISA (EISA) bus, Micro Channel Architecture (MCA)bus, Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, SAN bus, or any othercommunication or signaling medium, such as Ethernet, ISDN, T1,satellite, wireless, and so on. The I/O interface may be implemented asknown or may become known in the art, to provide data communicationbetween the processor and the network, using any applicable standard(e.g., one of the various PCI, USB or Ethernet standards, for exampleand without limitation).

Reference throughout this specification to “one embodiment”, “anembodiment”, or a specific “embodiment” means that a particular feature,structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodimentis included in at least one embodiment of the present invention and notnecessarily in all embodiments, and further, are not necessarilyreferring to the same embodiment. Furthermore, the particular features,structures, or characteristics of any specific embodiment of the presentinvention may be combined in any suitable manner and in any suitablecombination with one or more other embodiments, including the use ofselected features without corresponding use of other features. Inaddition, many modifications may be made to adapt a particularapplication, situation or material to the essential scope and spirit ofthe present invention. It is to be understood that other variations andmodifications of the embodiments of the present invention described andillustrated herein are possible in light of the teachings herein and areto be considered part of the spirit and scope of the present invention.

It will also be appreciated that one or more of the elements depicted inthe Figures can also be implemented in a more separate or integratedmanner, or even removed or rendered inoperable in certain cases, as maybe useful in accordance with a particular application. Integrally formedcombinations of components are also within the scope of the invention,particularly for embodiments in which a separation or combination ofdiscrete components is unclear or indiscernible. In addition, use of theterm “coupled” herein, including in its various forms such as “coupling”or “couplable”, means and includes any direct or indirect electrical,structural or magnetic coupling, connection or attachment, or adaptationor capability for such a direct or indirect electrical, structural ormagnetic coupling, connection or attachment, including integrally formedcomponents and components which are coupled via or through anothercomponent.

Furthermore, any signal arrows in the drawings/Figures should beconsidered only exemplary, and not limiting, unless otherwisespecifically noted. Combinations of components of steps will also beconsidered within the scope of the present invention, particularly wherethe ability to separate or combine is unclear or foreseeable. Thedisjunctive term “or”, as used herein and throughout the claims thatfollow, is generally intended to mean “and/or”, having both conjunctiveand disjunctive meanings (and is not confined to an “exclusive or”meaning), unless otherwise indicated. As used in the description hereinand throughout the claims that follow, “a”, “an”, and “the” includeplural references unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Also asused in the description herein and throughout the claims that follow,the meaning of “in” includes “in” and “on” unless the context clearlydictates otherwise.

The foregoing description of illustrated embodiments of the presentinvention, including what is described in the summary or in theabstract, is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention tothe precise forms disclosed herein. From the foregoing, it will beobserved that numerous variations and modifications may be effectedwithout departing from the spirit and scope of the novel concept of theinvention. It is to be understood that no limitation with respect to thespecific methods and apparatus illustrated herein is intended or shouldbe inferred. It is, of course, intended to cover by the appended claimsall such modifications as fall within the scope of the claims.

1. An integrated circuit, comprising: a configurable circuit elementconfigurable for a plurality of data operations, each data operationcorresponding to a context of a plurality of contexts; a plurality ofinput queues; a plurality of output queues; one or more configurationand control registers to store, for each context of the plurality ofcontexts, a plurality of configuration bits, a run status bit, and aplurality of bits designating at least one data input queue and at leastone data output queue; and an element controller coupled to theconfigurable circuit element and to the one or more configuration andcontrol registers, the element controller to allow loading of a contextconfiguration and execution of a data operation upon the arrival ofinput data in the context-designated data input queue when the contextrun status is enabled and the context-designated data output queue has astatus to accept output data.
 2. The integrated circuit of claim 1,wherein the one or more configuration and control registers furtherstore, for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofexecution context chaining bits designating a lead context and a nextcontext, and wherein the element controller further to sequenceexecution of a plurality of data operations in an order determined bythe plurality of execution context chaining bits.
 3. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, further comprising: an input controller coupled tothe context-designated input queue; wherein when the context-designateddata input queue does not have a status to accept data for the selectedcontext, the input controller is to issue a data deny signal to a sourceof the input data.
 4. The integrated circuit of claim 3, furthercomprising: an output controller coupled to the context-designatedoutput queue; wherein when the output controller receives a data denysignal following a first data broadcast, the output controller at alater time to direct a second data broadcast and issue a data retrysignal.
 5. The integrated circuit of claim 1, further comprising: asecond circuit coupled to the configuration and control register, thesecond circuit to enable the run status for each context of theplurality of contexts.
 6. The integrated circuit of claim 5, wherein thesecond circuit is a message manager circuit.
 7. The integrated circuitof claim 5, wherein the second circuit is a sequential processor.
 8. Theintegrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller further isto not allow the data operation to execute unless a condition has beenmet or unless a state ready status has been enabled.
 9. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller further is toconfigure the configurable circuit element for the plurality of dataoperations using the plurality of configuration bits stored in the oneor more configuration and control registers.
 10. The integrated circuitof claim 1, wherein the one or more configuration and control registersfurther store, for each context of the plurality of contexts, adesignated data source address and a data source context.
 11. Theintegrated circuit of claim 10, further comprising: an input controller;wherein the input controller is to compare a received data sourceaddress and source context with the context-designated data sourceaddress and data source context and, when the received data sourceaddress and data source context match the context-designated data sourceaddress and data source context, to allow input of data into thecontext-designated input queue.
 12. The integrated circuit of claim 10,further comprising: an input controller; and a full interconnect buscomprising a plurality of data lines and a plurality of control lines,the plurality of control lines coupled to the input controller and theplurality of data lines coupled to the plurality of input queues;wherein the input controller is to compare a data source address andsource context broadcast on the plurality of control lines of the fullinterconnect bus with the context-designated data source address anddata source context and, when the broadcast data source address and datasource context match the context-designated data source address and datasource context, to allow input of data into the context-designated inputqueue.
 13. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the elementcontroller further is to select a context-designated output of aplurality of outputs of a plurality of configurable circuit elements.14. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the element controllerfurther is to provide for the configurable circuit element to executethe data operation using input data as a constant.
 15. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller further is to providefor the configurable circuit element to execute the data operation onlyonce until a control signal is received.
 16. The integrated circuit ofclaim 15, wherein the element controller further is to generate aninterrupt signal.
 17. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the oneor more configuration and control registers further store, for eachcontext of the plurality of contexts, a plurality of output contextchaining bits designating a lead output context and a next outputcontext, and further comprising: an output controller, the outputcontroller to sequence broadcast of output data in an order determinedby the plurality of output context chaining bits.
 18. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, wherein the one or more configuration and controlregisters further store, for a first context of the plurality ofcontexts, a plurality of output mapping bits designating that a dataoutput broadcast is to be identified as a second, different context. 19.The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the one or more configurationand control registers further store, for each context of the pluralityof contexts, a plurality of bits designating a merger of input queuecontexts.
 20. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the one or moreconfiguration and control registers further store, for each context ofthe plurality of contexts, a plurality of bits designating a depth ofthe context-designated input queue.
 21. The integrated circuit of claim1, wherein the element controller further is to arbitrate among aplurality of data operations, or among a corresponding plurality ofcontexts, which are ready for execution, wherein the arbitration is atleast one of the following arbitration methods: a round-robin, apriority, a most recently executed, a least recently executed, ascheduled execution, or a concurrent execution.
 22. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller further is to providefor conditional data output based upon a result of the data operation.23. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller iscomprised of combinatorial logic gates.
 24. The integrated circuit ofclaim 1, wherein the element controller is comprised of combinatoriallogic gates and a finite state machine.
 25. The integrated circuit ofclaim 1, wherein the element controller further is to provide fornon-consumption of input data for the data operation.
 26. The integratedcircuit of claim 1, wherein when the configurable circuit element is amemory circuit element, the element controller further is to provide fora plurality of substantially concurrent memory read and memory writedata operations.
 27. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein when theconfigurable circuit element is a memory circuit element, the elementcontroller further is to provide for a plurality of substantiallyconcurrent read operations from the plurality of data inputs or aplurality of substantially concurrent write operations to the pluralityof data outputs.
 28. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein when theconfigurable circuit element is a memory circuit element, the elementcontroller further is to allow execution of a memory read or writeoperation without a context-designated data input queue and without acontext-designated data output queue.
 29. The integrated circuit ofclaim 1, wherein element controller further is to determine whether aselected data input is a context-designated data input and determinewhether a selected data output is a context-designated data output basedupon an occurrence of a condition or based upon a result of a selecteddata operation.
 30. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein theelement controller further is to switch from a first context and allowloading of a second context configuration and execution of a secondcontext data operation upon the arrival of input data in the data inputqueue designated for the second context.
 31. The integrated circuit ofclaim 1, wherein the element controller further is to allow loading ofthe context configuration and execution of a data operation only uponthe arrival of input data in all of the context-designated data inputqueues when the context run status is enabled and all of thecontext-designated data output queues have a status to accept outputdata.
 32. The integrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the elementcontroller further is to allow loading of the context configuration andan initial execution of a data operation and, when input data has notarrived in the context-designated data input queue, further is to halt acompletion of the data operation.
 33. The integrated circuit of claim 1,wherein the element controller further is to allow a partial executionof a data operation and storage of interim results in a memory.
 34. Theintegrated circuit of claim 1, wherein the element controller further isto not allow loading of the context configuration and execution of adata operation when the context run status is set to suspend, or set tohalt, or set to free.
 35. An integrated circuit, comprising: aconfigurable circuit element configurable for a plurality of dataoperations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; at least one configuration and control register to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, a plurality of bits designating adata source address and a data source context, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an input controller to allow input of data into thecontext-designated input queue when a received data source address anddata source context match the context-designated data source address anddata source context; and an element controller coupled to theconfigurable circuit element and to the at least one configuration andcontrol register, the element controller to allow loading of a contextconfiguration and execution of a data operation upon the arrival ofinput data in the context-designated data input queue when the contextrun status is enabled and the context-designated data output has astatus to accept output data.
 36. The integrated circuit of claim 35,further comprising: an input controller coupled to thecontext-designated input queue; wherein when the context-designated datainput queue does not have a status to accept data for the selectedcontext, the input controller is to issue a data deny signal to a sourceof the input data.
 37. The integrated circuit of claim 36, furthercomprising: an output controller coupled to the context-designatedoutput queue; wherein when the output controller receives a data denysignal following a first data broadcast, the output controller at alater time to direct a second data broadcast and issue a data retrysignal.
 38. The integrated circuit of claim 35, further comprising: asecond circuit coupled to the at least one configuration and controlregister, the second circuit to enable the run status for each contextof the plurality of contexts.
 39. The integrated circuit of claim 35,further comprising: an input controller; a full interconnect buscomprising a plurality of data lines and a plurality of control lines,the plurality of control lines coupled to the input controller and theplurality of data lines coupled to the plurality of input queues;wherein the input controller is to compare a data source address andsource context broadcast on the plurality of control lines of the fullinterconnect bus with the context-designated data source address anddata source context and, when the broadcast data source address and datasource context match the context-designated data source address and datasource context, to allow input of data into the context-designated inputqueue.
 40. The integrated circuit of claim 35, wherein the elementcontroller further is to select a context-designated output of aplurality of outputs of a plurality of configurable circuit elements.41. The integrated circuit of claim 35, wherein element controllerfurther is to determine whether a selected data input is acontext-designated data input and determine whether a selected dataoutput is a context-designated data output based upon an occurrence of acondition or based upon a result of a selected data operation.
 42. Anintegrated circuit, comprising: a configurable circuit elementconfigurable for a plurality of data operations, each data operationcorresponding to a context of a plurality of contexts; a plurality ofinput queues; a plurality of output queues; at least one configurationand control register to store, for each context of the plurality ofcontexts, a plurality of configuration bits, a run status bit, and aplurality of bits designating at least one data input queue and at leastone data output queue; an input controller coupled to the plurality ofinput queues, the input controller is to issue a data deny signal to asource of the input data when the context-designated data input queuedoes not have a status to accept data for the selected context; anoutput controller coupled to the plurality of output queues, and whenthe output controller receives a data deny signal following a first databroadcast, the output controller to direct a second data broadcast andissue a data retry signal at a later time; and an element controllercoupled to the configurable circuit element and to the at least oneconfiguration and control register, the element controller to allowloading of a context configuration and execution of a data operationupon the arrival of input data in the context-designated data inputqueue when the context run status is enabled and the context-designateddata output has a status to accept output data.
 43. The integratedcircuit of claim 42, wherein the at least one configuration and controlregister further stores, for each context of the plurality of contexts,a designated data source address and a data source context.
 44. Theintegrated circuit of claim 43, wherein the input controller is tocompare a received data source address and source context with thecontext-designated data source address and data source context and, whenthe received data source address and data source context match thecontext-designated data source address and data source context, to allowinput of data into the context-designated input queue.
 45. Theintegrated circuit of claim 43, further comprising: a full interconnectbus comprising a plurality of data lines and a plurality of controllines, the plurality of control lines coupled to the input controllerand the plurality of data lines coupled to the plurality of inputqueues; wherein the input controller is to compare a data source addressand source context broadcast on the plurality of control lines of thefull interconnect bus with the context-designated data source addressand data source context and, when the broadcast data source address anddata source context match the context-designated data source address anddata source context, to allow input of data into the context-designatedinput queue.
 46. The integrated circuit of claim 42, wherein the elementcontroller further is to switch from a first context and allow loadingof a second context configuration and execution of a second context dataoperation upon the arrival of input data in the data input queuedesignated for the second context.
 47. An integrated circuit,comprising: a configurable circuit element configurable for a pluralityof data operations, each data operation corresponding to a context of aplurality of contexts; a plurality of input queues; a plurality ofoutput queues; at least one configuration and control register to store,for each context of the plurality of contexts, a plurality ofconfiguration bits, a run status bit, and a plurality of bitsdesignating at least one data input queue and at least one data outputqueue; an element controller coupled to the configurable circuit elementand to the at least one configuration and control register, the elementcontroller to allow loading of a context configuration and partial orconditional execution of a data operation upon the arrival of input datain the context-designated data input queue when the context run statusis enabled and the context-designated data output queue has a status toaccept output data.
 48. The integrated circuit of claim 47, furthercomprising: an input controller coupled to the context-designated inputqueue; wherein when the context-designated data input queue does nothave a status to accept data for the selected context, the inputcontroller is to issue a data deny signal to a source of the input data.49. The integrated circuit of claim 48, further comprising: an outputcontroller coupled to the context-designated output queue; wherein whenthe output controller receives a data deny signal following a first databroadcast, the output controller at a later time to direct a second databroadcast and issue a data retry signal.
 50. The integrated circuit ofclaim 47, wherein the at least one configuration and control registerfurther stores, for each context of the plurality of contexts, adesignated data source address and a data source context.
 51. Theintegrated circuit of claim 50, further comprising: an input controller;wherein the input controller is to compare a received data sourceaddress and source context with the context-designated data sourceaddress and data source context and, when the received data sourceaddress and data source context match the context-designated data sourceaddress and data source context, to allow input of data into thecontext-designated input queue.